User Manual - Oracle Documentation

User Manual - Oracle Documentation
Oracle AutoVue
User’s Manual
November 2015
Copyright © 1999, 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software Copyright 1996-2007 Glyph & Cog, LLC.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and
are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may
not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or display any part, in
any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for
interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors,
please report them to us in writing.
If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agencyspecific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the
restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).
Oracle USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.
This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for
use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by
use of this software in dangerous applications.
This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services from third parties. Oracle
Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party
content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred
due to your access to or use of third party content, products or services.
November 2015
Contents
Preface........................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Audience.............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Related Documents ......................................................................................................................................... 13
Conventions ....................................................................................................................................................... 14
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................. 15
Oracle AutoVue ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Marking Up Documents................................................................................................................................. 16
AutoVue Basics........................................................................................................................................................ 17
AutoVue Version Information ...................................................................................................................... 17
Viewing Version and Build Information........................................................................................... 17
AutoVue Graphical User Interface.............................................................................................................. 18
PinMe Icon.................................................................................................................................................. 19
Menu Bar..................................................................................................................................................... 19
Toolbars....................................................................................................................................................... 19
Navigation Panel...................................................................................................................................... 20
Markup Navigation Tree........................................................................................................................ 26
Status Bar.................................................................................................................................................... 26
Quick Menus.............................................................................................................................................. 27
Moving Objects ........................................................................................................................................ 27
Accessing Commands with Shortcut Menus................................................................................. 28
Canceling an Operation in Progress ................................................................................................. 28
Opening Files ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Opening a Local File ............................................................................................................................... 28
Opening a URL.......................................................................................................................................... 29
Opening a File from Agile PLM ........................................................................................................... 29
Streaming Files ......................................................................................................................................... 30
Archive Files............................................................................................................................................... 30
File Properties ........................................................................................................................................... 31
Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages ............................................................................... 32
Opening Agile Attachment Files................................................................................................................. 32
Viewing Files from Web Client, Attachments Tab ....................................................................... 32
Viewing Files from Web Client, Files Tab ........................................................................................ 33
Viewing Files from Java Client, Attachments Tab........................................................................ 33
Viewing Files from Java Client, Files Tab......................................................................................... 33
Opening Agile Attachment Files form the Viewer Window..................................................... 34
Comparing Revisions or Versions of a File...................................................................................... 36
Viewing Design Object Structures..................................................................................................... 37
Viewing Document Structured File Types ...................................................................................... 38
Using the Version Browser ................................................................................................................... 40
Accessing Different File Versions from the Business Object Attachments Tab ................ 42
Comparing Files...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Comparing Files in Web Client and Java Client..................................................................................... 45
Comparing Files by Search ........................................................................................................................... 46
Initiating a File Compare by Search .................................................................................................. 46
Initiate Compare in AutoVue........................................................................................................................ 47
Initiating Compare in AutoVue........................................................................................................... 48
Selecting a File From Local Directory ............................................................................................... 48
Selecting a File from Agile Bookmarks............................................................................................. 49
Selecting a File with Agile Search...................................................................................................... 49
Working With 2D Files .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Searching Text................................................................................................................................................... 51
2D Viewing Options......................................................................................................................................... 52
Using the Pan and Zoom Window .................................................................................................... 55
Working with 2D Vector Files....................................................................................................................... 56
Manipulating 2D Vector Files .............................................................................................................. 56
Selecting Views......................................................................................................................................... 65
Specifying a View Point ......................................................................................................................... 66
Analyzing 2D Vector Files ..................................................................................................................... 66
Comparing 2D Files................................................................................................................................. 67
Drawing Information.............................................................................................................................. 69
Working with PDF Files .................................................................................................................................. 71
Navigating Through PDF Files ............................................................................................................ 71
Navigating Through Markups ............................................................................................................. 71
Measuring in PDF Files........................................................................................................................... 71
Text Search................................................................................................................................................. 72
Text Selection/Copy................................................................................................................................ 72
Measuring in 2D Files...................................................................................................................................... 73
2D Vector Snapping Modes ................................................................................................................. 73
Distance in non-Vector Files ................................................................................................................ 74
Distance in Vector Files.......................................................................................................................... 75
Calibrating Distance ............................................................................................................................... 76
Area in non-Vector Files ........................................................................................................................ 76
Area in Vector Files.................................................................................................................................. 77
Angle in non-Vector Files...................................................................................................................... 78
Angle in Vector Files ............................................................................................................................... 79
Arc in non-Vector Files........................................................................................................................... 80
Arc in Vector Files .................................................................................................................................... 80
Calibrating an Arc .................................................................................................................................... 81
Working with EDA Files........................................................................................................................................ 83
Navigation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 83
Customizing Columns............................................................................................................................ 84
Components Tab .............................................................................................................................................. 85
Nets Tab ............................................................................................................................................................... 86
Bookmarks Tab.................................................................................................................................................. 88
Selecting Entities .............................................................................................................................................. 88
From the Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 89
From the Workspace .............................................................................................................................. 89
From the Entity Search Dialog ............................................................................................................ 90
Zooming to a Selected Entity....................................................................................................................... 90
Filtering Entity Types ...................................................................................................................................... 91
Entity Properties ............................................................................................................................................... 91
Viewing the Properties of an Entity................................................................................................... 93
Navigating Design Hierarchy ....................................................................................................................... 95
Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy.................................................................................................. 95
Navigating using Descend Hierarchy............................................................................................... 96
Layers.................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Physical and Logical Layers Sections................................................................................................ 97
Changing the Order of Layers ............................................................................................................. 98
Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers............................................................................................ 99
Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers............................................................................................100
Modifying Polarity .................................................................................................................................101
Changing Layer Color...........................................................................................................................101
Sorting Logical Layers ..........................................................................................................................102
Layer Sets ..........................................................................................................................................................102
Viewing Layer Sets ................................................................................................................................103
Creating User-Defined Layer Sets....................................................................................................103
Deleting User-Defined Layer Sets....................................................................................................104
Saving User-Defined Layers Sets with Markups .........................................................................105
Manipulating EDA Views .............................................................................................................................105
3D View ..............................................................................................................................................................106
Cross Probing...................................................................................................................................................106
Initiate Cross Probing ...........................................................................................................................106
Cross Probing in Web Client and Java Client...............................................................................110
Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files .........................................................................111
Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File ...................................................113
Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing ................................................................114
Zooming when Cross Probing ..........................................................................................................114
Comparing a PCB with Artwork ................................................................................................................115
Generating Bill of Material (BOM).............................................................................................................116
Design Verification.........................................................................................................................................118
Design Rule Checks...............................................................................................................................118
Verifying a Design..................................................................................................................................122
Exporting the Design Verification Results ....................................................................................123
Searching Using Entity Search...................................................................................................................124
Performing an Entity Type-based Search .....................................................................................125
Performing an Attribute-based Search..........................................................................................126
Measuring in EDA Files .................................................................................................................................127
EDA Snapping Modes ..........................................................................................................................127
Measuring Distance ..............................................................................................................................129
Calibrating Distance .............................................................................................................................129
Measuring Minimum Distance..........................................................................................................130
Measuring Area ......................................................................................................................................131
Measuring an Angle..............................................................................................................................132
Measuring an Arc...................................................................................................................................133
Calibrating an Arc ..................................................................................................................................134
Working with 3D Files.........................................................................................................................................135
Understanding 3D Basics.............................................................................................................................135
Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in Multiple-file File Folder from the 9.3x Web Client.......136
Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple-file File Folder from Java Client.....................137
Models Tab and Model Tree .......................................................................................................................137
Views Tab ..........................................................................................................................................................138
Bookmarks Tab................................................................................................................................................139
Global Axes .......................................................................................................................................................139
Selecting Model Parts ...................................................................................................................................140
Select Model Parts from the Workspace .......................................................................................140
Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model .........................................................................................140
Re-Centering ....................................................................................................................................................141
Re-Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part ........................................................................141
Re-Center All............................................................................................................................................141
Entity Reference .....................................................................................................................................141
Re-Centering a Model to an Entity ..................................................................................................142
Model Tree ........................................................................................................................................................142
Expanding/Collapsing the Model Tree ..........................................................................................143
Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon.........................................................................................143
Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree ................................................................................144
Hiding Model Parts................................................................................................................................144
Manipulating Display of a 3D Model.......................................................................................................145
Display Attributes...........................................................................................................................................147
Render Modes.........................................................................................................................................147
Changing the Visibility.........................................................................................................................148
Changing Model Color.........................................................................................................................149
Adjusting the Transparency...............................................................................................................149
Light Settings...................................................................................................................................................150
Setting Ambient Lighting...................................................................................................................150
Setting Directional Lighting ..............................................................................................................151
Adding a New Light Source ...............................................................................................................151
Changing the Light Properties..........................................................................................................152
Removing a Light Source....................................................................................................................153
3D Views ............................................................................................................................................................153
Default View ............................................................................................................................................153
Setting Standard or Camera Views..................................................................................................153
Setting Native Views.............................................................................................................................154
Creating a User-Defined View ...........................................................................................................154
Deleting a User-Defined View...........................................................................................................155
Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model ..............................................................155
Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point............................................................................155
Entity Properties .............................................................................................................................................156
General Attributes .................................................................................................................................156
Viewing Attributes ................................................................................................................................157
Viewing Mass Properties.....................................................................................................................158
Configuring Mass Properties .............................................................................................................159
Viewing Extents......................................................................................................................................160
PMI Entities .......................................................................................................................................................160
PMI Filtering.............................................................................................................................................161
Aligning to a PMI Entity.......................................................................................................................162
Go to a Displayed PMI Entity .............................................................................................................162
PMI Configuration Entities .................................................................................................................162
PMI Hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................163
Manipulating a 3D Model............................................................................................................................164
Panning a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis.................................................................................164
Rotating a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis ................................................................................165
Scaling a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis...................................................................................165
Transforming a 3D Model............................................................................................................................166
Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons......................................................................167
Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model ..............................................................................168
Transforming a Model by Setting Values......................................................................................169
Sectioning .........................................................................................................................................................170
Section Plane Options..........................................................................................................................170
Cut Options..............................................................................................................................................170
Defining the Section Plane and Cut-through..............................................................................171
Exploding ..........................................................................................................................................................172
Explode Options.....................................................................................................................................172
Exploding a 3D Model..........................................................................................................................173
Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model.......................................................................................173
Comparing 3D Files .......................................................................................................................................174
Comparing 3D Files...............................................................................................................................175
Comparing Entity Sets .........................................................................................................................176
Generating a Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................178
Entity Search ....................................................................................................................................................180
Performing a Search .............................................................................................................................182
Performing a 3D Text Search.............................................................................................................183
Performing an Attribute-based Search..........................................................................................183
Performing an Advanced 3D Search .......................................................................................................185
Saving Search Results...........................................................................................................................186
Measuring in 3D Files....................................................................................................................................187
3D Snapping Modes .............................................................................................................................187
Measuring Distance ..............................................................................................................................188
Calibrating Distance .............................................................................................................................190
Measuring Minimum Distance..........................................................................................................191
Measuring an Angle..............................................................................................................................192
Measuring an Arc...................................................................................................................................192
Calibrating an Arc ..................................................................................................................................193
Measuring Vertex Coordinates .........................................................................................................194
Measuring the Length of an Edge ...................................................................................................194
Measuring Face Surface ......................................................................................................................195
Walkthrough ....................................................................................................................................................196
Walkthrough Dialog .............................................................................................................................197
Walking Through a 3D Model ...........................................................................................................198
Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode........................................................................................199
Configuring AutoVue..........................................................................................................................................201
General Options..............................................................................................................................................202
Configuring Options for CAD Files ..................................................................................................202
Raster Files................................................................................................................................................203
Rendering .................................................................................................................................................203
Resources..................................................................................................................................................203
Configuring Paths..................................................................................................................................204
Measurement ..........................................................................................................................................205
Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files ..............................................................206
Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files.............................................................................................................206
Snap Settings ..........................................................................................................................................207
Overlays Extents Settings ...................................................................................................................207
Configuring Colors ................................................................................................................................207
Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files.............................................................................................................208
Rendering .................................................................................................................................................208
Dynamic Rendering ..............................................................................................................................208
Frame Rate ...............................................................................................................................................209
Optimized Rendering...........................................................................................................................209
Model .........................................................................................................................................................209
Loading......................................................................................................................................................210
Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution.......................................................................................................210
Initial Visibility.........................................................................................................................................210
PMI Initial Visibility ................................................................................................................................211
PMI Filtering.............................................................................................................................................211
Configuring Color ..................................................................................................................................211
Configuring Background ....................................................................................................................212
Miscellaneous..........................................................................................................................................214
Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files..........................................................................................................215
Customizing Selections .......................................................................................................................215
Displaying Tooltips ...............................................................................................................................216
Modifying 3D View................................................................................................................................216
Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files .............................................................................217
Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing.....................................................................217
Modifying Colors....................................................................................................................................218
Enhanced Display Options .................................................................................................................219
Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files..............................................................................220
Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office ..........................................................................221
Markups ...................................................................................................................................................................223
Markup Navigation Tree ..............................................................................................................................224
Filtering Markups............................................................................................................................................225
Ad Hoc Markups..............................................................................................................................................226
Guidelines for Marking Up or Redlining Attachments......................................................................227
Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9.3.x ..............................................................................227
Java Client ECO Markups ....................................................................................................................229
Redlining Markups for Change Orders...........................................................................................229
Markup Promotion.........................................................................................................................................233
Markup Promotion for Change-Based Markups.........................................................................233
Markup Promotion for Ad-Hoc Markups.......................................................................................234
Working with Markup Files .........................................................................................................................235
Saved States.............................................................................................................................................235
Creating a Markup File.........................................................................................................................236
Entering Markup Information ...........................................................................................................236
Saving a New Markup File ..................................................................................................................237
Opening Markup Files..........................................................................................................................237
Saving an Existing Markup File .........................................................................................................238
Importing a Markup File......................................................................................................................238
Exporting a Markup File ......................................................................................................................239
Setting the Active Markup File..........................................................................................................240
Changing the Active Markup File ....................................................................................................240
Working with Markup Layers .....................................................................................................................241
Creating a Markup Layer .....................................................................................................................241
Setting the Active Markup Layer......................................................................................................242
Changing the Color of a Markup Layer..........................................................................................242
Renaming a Markup Layer..................................................................................................................243
Toggling between Markup Layers...................................................................................................243
Deleting a Markup Layer.....................................................................................................................244
Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer ...................................................................................244
Consolidating Markup Files ........................................................................................................................245
Marking up 2D and 3D Files........................................................................................................................246
Adding an Attachment........................................................................................................................247
Opening an Attachment .....................................................................................................................247
Editing an Attachment.........................................................................................................................248
Adding a Hyperlink ...............................................................................................................................248
Creating a Hyperlink .............................................................................................................................249
Opening a Hyperlink.............................................................................................................................250
Editing a Hyperlink................................................................................................................................250
Deleting a Hyperlink.............................................................................................................................251
Adding Signoff Entities........................................................................................................................251
Rescinding the Signoff.........................................................................................................................252
Re-Approving a Signoff .......................................................................................................................252
Viewing the History of a Signoff.......................................................................................................253
Adding a Symbol ...................................................................................................................................253
Creating a New Symbol Library ........................................................................................................255
Deleting a Symbol Library ..................................................................................................................256
2D-Specific Markups......................................................................................................................................256
2D Markup Entities................................................................................................................................257
Adding a Freestyle Entity....................................................................................................................258
Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes..................................................259
Adding a Leader.....................................................................................................................................260
Creating 2D non-Vector Markup Measure Entities....................................................................261
Creating a Stamp ...................................................................................................................................267
Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities ......................................................................................271
2D Vector Snapping Modes ...............................................................................................................272
Measuring Distance ..............................................................................................................................273
Measuring Cumulative Distance ......................................................................................................274
Calibrating Distance .............................................................................................................................274
Measuring Area ......................................................................................................................................275
Measuring an Angle..............................................................................................................................276
Measuring an Arc...................................................................................................................................277
Calibrating an Arc ..................................................................................................................................278
Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities .................................................................................................278
EDA Snapping Modes ..........................................................................................................................279
Measuring Distance ..............................................................................................................................280
Measuring Cumulative Distance ......................................................................................................281
Calibrating Distance .............................................................................................................................282
Measuring Area ......................................................................................................................................283
Measuring an Angle..............................................................................................................................284
Measuring an Arc...................................................................................................................................285
Calibrating an Arc ..................................................................................................................................286
Measuring Minimum Distance..........................................................................................................286
Adding Text ......................................................................................................................................................287
Hiding the box surrounding the text..............................................................................................288
Adding a Note..................................................................................................................................................289
Printing a Note........................................................................................................................................290
Nesting Markup Entities...............................................................................................................................290
3D-Specific Markups......................................................................................................................................291
3D Markup Entities................................................................................................................................291
Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities ...........................................................................................292
Adding Text ............................................................................................................................................301
Adding a Note.........................................................................................................................................302
Nesting Markup Entities ......................................................................................................................303
Working with Markup Entities ...................................................................................................................304
Go To a Markup Entity..........................................................................................................................304
Selecting Markup Entities ...................................................................................................................305
Moving a Markup Entity ......................................................................................................................305
Transforming Markup Entities...........................................................................................................305
Rotating a selected Markup Entity ..................................................................................................305
Changing Object Order .......................................................................................................................306
Hiding All Markup Entities..................................................................................................................306
Hiding Markup Files ..............................................................................................................................307
Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities................................................................................307
Deleting Markup Entities ....................................................................................................................308
Formatting Markup Entity Properties .....................................................................................................308
Changing Line Color.............................................................................................................................309
Changing Line Style..............................................................................................................................309
Changing Line Thickness ....................................................................................................................310
Changing Arrow Style ..........................................................................................................................311
Changing Fill Type.................................................................................................................................311
Changing Fill Color................................................................................................................................312
Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer .........................................................313
Changing Font........................................................................................................................................313
Changing Measurement Units and Symbols...............................................................................314
Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog..................................................................................314
Printing ....................................................................................................................................................................321
Print Options ....................................................................................................................................................321
Configuring the Print Options ...................................................................................................................324
Print Margins....................................................................................................................................................324
Setting the Margins...............................................................................................................................325
Header/Footer .................................................................................................................................................326
Adding a Header and Footer .............................................................................................................327
Native Print Settings.............................................................................................................................327
Watermarks.......................................................................................................................................................328
Adding a Watermark ............................................................................................................................329
Assigning Pen Settings.................................................................................................................................330
Creating a New Pen Setting...............................................................................................................331
Deleting a Pen Setting .........................................................................................................................331
Partial Preview of a File ................................................................................................................................331
Previewing a File Before Printing..............................................................................................................332
Printing a File ...................................................................................................................................................333
Batch Printing ..................................................................................................................................................333
Conversion..............................................................................................................................................................335
Conversion Options.......................................................................................................................................335
PDF.......................................................................................................................................................................336
X and Y................................................................................................................................................................337
Converting a File.............................................................................................................................................337
Changing the Pen Settings .........................................................................................................................338
Real-Time Collaboration ....................................................................................................................................341
Collaboration User Tree ...............................................................................................................................341
The Host.............................................................................................................................................................342
The Controller..................................................................................................................................................342
Lock .....................................................................................................................................................................342
Observer ............................................................................................................................................................343
Opening a File..................................................................................................................................................343
Pointer ................................................................................................................................................................344
Session Information.......................................................................................................................................344
Session Markup ...............................................................................................................................................344
Show Presenter Window .............................................................................................................................344
Collaboration Session ...................................................................................................................................345
Initiating a Collaboration Session....................................................................................................345
Changing a User’s Layer Color of a Session..................................................................................346
Adding New Users to a Session ........................................................................................................346
Opening a Markup While Initiating a Session .............................................................................347
Opening a Markup During a Session ..............................................................................................348
Joining a Session....................................................................................................................................348
Inviting Users During a Session ........................................................................................................349
Removing Users from a Session .......................................................................................................349
Assigning a Host During a Session ..................................................................................................350
Passing Control of a Session to Another User .............................................................................350
Saving a Session Markup ....................................................................................................................351
Closing a Session....................................................................................................................................351
Requesting Control of a Session ......................................................................................................352
Tracking Changes ..................................................................................................................................352
Unlocking a View ...................................................................................................................................352
Locking a View........................................................................................................................................353
Viewing Session Information.............................................................................................................353
Leaving a Session...................................................................................................................................353
Chat Window ...................................................................................................................................................354
Sending a Message to Selected Users............................................................................................355
Sending a Message to All Users........................................................................................................355
Appendix A: EDA Terms and Definitions .....................................................................................................357
Feedback .................................................................................................................................................................365
General Inquiries.............................................................................................................................................365
Customer Support..........................................................................................................................................365
My Oracle Support AutoVue Community..............................................................................................366
Sales Inquiries ..................................................................................................................................................366
1
Preface
The Oracle AutoVue User Manual explores AutoVue's key capabilities and is
designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue's extensive functionality.
For the most up-to-date version of this document, go to the AutoVue Documentation Web site on the Oracle Technology Network at
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/documentation/autovue-091442.html.
Audience
This manual is intended for Oracle AutoVue end users.
Related Documents
For more information, see the following documents in the Oracle AutoVue
documentation library:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
•
Installation and Configuration Guide
•
Viewing Configuration Guide
•
Client/Server Deployment Security Guide
•
Release Notes
•
Supported Formats List
•
Product Variations - Feature Matrix
13
PREFACE
CONVENTIONS
Conventions
The following text conventions are used in this document:
Convention
14
Meaning
boldface
Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements
associated with an action, or terms defined in text or glossary.
italic
Italic type indicates book titles, emphasis, or placeholder
variables for which you supply particular values.
monospace
Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph, URLs,
code in examples, text that appears on the screen, or text that
you enter.
Client/Server
Deployment
References to Client/Server deployment also include AutoVue
for Agile PLM.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2
Introduction
Oracle's AutoVue suite of enterprise visualization solutions provides native
document viewing, markup and real-time collaboration capabilities that enable
Web-based document review on hundreds of native document types, including
2D/3D CAD, EDA, Office and graphic formats. AutoVue enterprise visualization solutions address the challenge of accessing, reviewing and collaborating
on documents, both internally and with globally dispersed teams and partners,
in a secure and reliable manner without compromising security or precision.
Improved team productivity, reduced errors, and accelerated innovation and
time to market are just a few of the business benefits organizations can expect
to achieve.This manual explores AutoVue's key capabilities and is designed to
help you get the most out of AutoVue's extensive functionality.
Oracle AutoVue
Oracle AutoVue is a viewing and markup application that has been developed
for both business and technical users. AutoVue is capable of displaying
hundreds of file formats without the authoring application. Supported file types
include Text, Office, Graphics, EDA, 2D Engineering Drawings, and 3D
Models. Even contents of archive files can viewed in AutoVue.
NOTE:
AutoVue will no longer open files with a missing or incorrect extension.
Oracle AutoVue is available in various product variations. Refer to the AutoVue
Product Variations – Feature Matrix document to see what features are available
for each variation.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
15
INTRODUCTION
MARKING UP DOCUMENTS
Marking Up Documents
AutoVue has the ability to create markups for all its readable file formats
without the document's authoring application. AutoVue creates markups for
different formats without modifying the original file.You can attach comments,
notes, and drawings to any file you display in AutoVue. This is called “marking
up a file”, commonly known as annotating or redlining. A markup is an object
or entity that you attach to a file. All markups are saved in a separate file called
a Markup or a Markup file. When you display a file with its markups, the
markups are overlaid as a layer on top of the drawing. AutoVue provides a
variety of flexible, user-friendly entities. To name a few, there are circles, clouds,
polygons, and leaders. You can also attach text to entities, insert a note for
longer comments, add attachments, or add a stamp such as a company logo. In
addition, you can create measurement markup entities and hyperlinks that link
between the current file and other associated files or applications.
16
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
3
AutoVue Basics
This section introduces the basics of working in AutoVue; such as starting and
exiting AutoVue, the help menu, changing the locale of AutoVue, displaying file
versions information, and the AutoVue graphical user interface (GUI). The
section on the AutoVue GUI discusses the included menu bars, tool bars, navigation panel, and navigation tree.
AutoVue Version Information
The About dialog displays AutoVue version and build information. You can also
view the version, build number, and build date of components that are shipped
with AutoVue. You can also export this information into a text file.
Viewing Version and Build Information
To view product version information:
TASK
1.
From the Help menu, select About.
STEP RESULT: The About dialog appears and displays the AutoVue version
number and build date.
2.
To view version and build information for components, click Version
Info.
3.
To export the version information click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Export dialog appears.
4.
Navigate and select the directory to which you want to export the list.
5.
Enter a file name (the default name is fverinfo.txt).
6.
Click Save.
STEP RESULT: The list is exported to the specified file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
17
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
7.
When you are finished viewing the file version information, click Close.
8.
Click OK to exit the About dialog.
AutoVue Graphical User Interface
This section introduces you to the basics of working with AutoVue’s graphical
user interface (GUI). The following image displays the AutoVue GUI for a 3D
drawing:
This is the default view of AutoVue. If you are using a customized
AutoVue GUI file, the menu items and toolbars may vary.
NOTE:
18
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
PinMe Icon
The PinMe feature allows you to keep the current AutoVue window open when
opening additional attachments. Located in the top-right corner of the AutoVue
window, clicking the PinMe icon pins (or locks) the current AutoVue window
so that it stays open. As a result, when viewing an additional attachement, a new
AutoVue window opens and you can switch between open windows to compare
or refer to multiple viewed files.
Menu Bar
The menu bar is the main access to all the menu commands. The selection of
commands changes according to the tasks being accomplished by AutoVue.
Toolbars
AutoVue has three toolbars: AutoVue toolbar, Markup Properties toolbar, and
Markup Entity toolbar.
AutoVue Toolbar
The AutoVue toolbar displays below the menu bar when you open AutoVue. It
is the default toolbar and includes the most commonly used functions when
viewing a file—open a file, create a new markup, print, zoom, and many others.
Depending on the file that is opened, the toolbar buttons will change. For
example, the following image shows the AutoVue toolbar when a 3D file is
open:
Markup Properties Toolbar
The Markup Properties toolbar displays below the AutoVue toolbar when you
enter Markup mode. It includes the available property and formatting options
for the markup entities—save markups, change font, fill type, line style, and
many others. The following image shows the default Markup Properties toolbar:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
19
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
Markup Entity Toolbar
The Markup Entity toolbar displays by default on the left side of the AutoVue
window when you enter Markup mode. It includes all the available markup
entities for the opened file. Depending on the file that is opened, the toolbar
buttons will change. For example, the following image shows the Markup Entity
toolbar when a 3D file is open:
The AutoVue GUI can be customized by the system administrator. The
GUI that is displayed is dependent upon whether it is customized and on the type
of customization.
NOTE:
Navigation Panel
The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left-hand side of the AutoVue
workspace when you view a drawing. For example, when viewing an EDA
drawing, it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances, nets,
and the associated pins and net nodes (pins connected to a net) present in the
current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board (PCB) design.
NOTE:
To hide or display the Navigation Panel, click
.
The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of
the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design. Lists can be
sorted in order to group similar component instances.
20
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
You can also use the Navigation Panel to select (highlight) single or multiple
components or entities; zoom to a component or entity, and query entity information.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
21
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
Bookmarks Tab
The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views (Draft views, 2D plans, 3D Views
of an EDA design) or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as
PDF.
Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link.
Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model
Space, the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts.
If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark, click it to expand and view the
lower bookmark levels. If a minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark, click
it to collapse the lower bookmark levels.
To go to a destination specified by a bookmark, click the bookmark text or the
page icon located to the left of the bookmark text.
Components Tab
NOTE:
The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing.
The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins.The top
portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the
drawing. The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected
instances.
22
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
When you select a component, it appears highlighted on the drawing. To select
more than one component, press the Shift or Control key while selecting. All
the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted.
Nets Tab
NOTE:
The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings.
The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes (pins connected to a net). The
top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing’s currently displayed page.
The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets.
All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing. To select more than one net,
press the Shift or Control key while selecting. Alternately, in the Nets panel,
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
23
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets. The
Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets.
Models Tab and Model Tree
The Models tab displays the Model Tree. The tree displays the model’s hierarchy,
inter-relation of different parts, assemblies, and bodies. The tree also indicates
if a required external reference (XRef) is missing. With the tree, you can select
different parts and modify their attributes such as color, visibility, render mode
or transformation.
See “Displaying XRefs”for more information on XRefs.
24
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
NOTE:
The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings.
Views Tab
The Views tab lists the defaults, standard, native, and user-defined views. You
can switch to a standard, native, or user-defined view, as well as add or delete
user-defined views.
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings.
25
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
Markup Navigation Tree
When you are in Markup mode, a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the
workspace. If the tree does not appear, from the Options menu, select Show
Panel, and then select Markup Panel.
The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users. You can
navigate through the markups. A set of properties is generated for each markup.
You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the
column headers. These properties are:
Property
Description
Markup Entity
Type of markup entity created.
Author
The name of the user who created the markup entity.
Last Modified
The date and time the markup entity was last modified.
Page
Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is
created.
Layer
Markup layer on which the markup entity is created.
When a markup entity is created, it appears in the tree and the information is
recorded and saved in the Markup file.
NOTE:
Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties.
Status Bar
When in View mode or Markup mode, the status bar is located at the bottom of
the main window. The fields displayed from left to right on the status bar are:
marker, current active filename, file type, zoom factor, current page and total
26
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
number of pages, current active file size, file creation date, and cursor’s coordinate position. The following image shows the status bar:
There are three markers that may be present on the status bar: the Markup Indicator icon
indicates associated markups, the Missing Resource icon indicate missing resources, and the Substituted Resource icon
indicates
substituted resources.
The Markup Indicator
indicates that the current active file has associated
markups. While in View mode, click the Markup Indicator icon to view the
Markup Files dialog, then select a Markup file or group of Markup files to open.
The Missing Resource icon indicates that some main resources required to
properly display the current active file are not available. To identify the missing
resources, click the Resource icon to display the Properties dialog.
The Substituted Resource icon indicates that if a required resource is missing,
AutoVue has replaced it with another resource. To identity the substituted
resources, click the Substituted Resource icon to display the Properties dialog.
Quick Menus
One of the quickest ways to access options is through Quick Menus or
context-sensitive shortcut menus. These are the menus you see when you
right-click in the workspace, Markup Navigation Tree, and Model Tree. The
available Quick Menu options depend on the location where you right-click.
Moving Objects
The left mouse button provides different functionality in the View and Markup
modes:
Mode
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Left Mouse Button Functionality
View Mode
By default, drag to perform an auto-zoom of all supported file formats
(excluding 3D formats). Select the area to enlarge.
Markup Mode
If objects are selected, drag to modify and move objects. If no objects
are selected, then drag to perform an auto-zoom (same as in View
mode).
27
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING FILES
Accessing Commands with Shortcut Menus
AutoVue provides shortcut menus to access the majority of its functions. To do
so, right-click with the pointer in the View window to access to the appropriate
commands.
Canceling an Operation in Progress
To cancel an operation in progress, right-click the mouse any where in the
AutoVue applet.
For example, if while drawing a box you realize that you would prefer to draw a
cloud, right-click while drawing the box to cancel the operation.
Opening Files
You can open base files and Markup files from the File menu and Markup
menu, respectively.
Opening a Local File
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Open
File .
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
2.
Browse to locate the file that you want to open.
3.
Click Open.
RESULT:
The file opens in the AutoVue workspace.
28
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING FILES
Opening a URL
You can open a file by specifying the URL to the file.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Open
File .
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
2.
From the left panel, click Web URL
.
3.
In the File name field, enter the URL of the file to open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For example, http://AutoVueServer/files/abc.dwg or
ftp://ftpserver1.com/files/abc.doc.
4.
Click Open.
RESULT:
The file opens in the AutoVue workspace.
Opening a File from Agile PLM
NOTE:
This section only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
With AutoVue for Agile, you can open a file located in Agile PLM from the File
Open dialog.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Open.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
2.
To open a file from the backend DMS system, from the left panel, click
Agile .
STEP RESULT: The bookmarked Agile Objects appear in the File Open dialog.
3.
Select a file and then click Open.
RESULT:
The file opens in the AutoVue workspace.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
29
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING FILES
Searching for Files in Agile PLM
With AutoVue for Agile, you can search for files in the system by entering
specific search criteria in the File Open dialog.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Open.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
2.
To search for a file in Agile PLM, from the left panel, click Search Agile
.
STEP RESULT: The search criteria options load in the File Open dialog.
3.
Enter the search criteria and then click Search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Alternately, to view all files in Agile PLM, leave the
search criteria fields empty and click Search.
STEP RESULT: The file results appear in the dialog. For each AutoVue session, all
search results are saved and can be referenced from the File Open dialog as
Search Results 1, Search Results 2, and so on.
4.
Select a file and then click Open.
RESULT:
The file opens in the AutoVue workspace.
Streaming Files
AutoVue generates streaming files for most supported file formats. When a file
is accessed by AutoVue for the first time, a streaming file is generated. The
streaming file contains file data and provides the benefit that AutoVue can
access the streaming file much faster than it can the native file. As a result,
rendering time is significantly faster when loading from the streaming file.
If the native file changes or its external resource files change or if an INI option
changes, the streaming file is invalidated. In this case, AutoVue opens the
display from the native file and generates a new streaming file.
Archive Files
The full archive file directory displays in the AutoVue window. It is not necessary to decompress the file. Double-click a file to display it within AutoVue. If
you would like to markup an archived file, the file must be made accessible to
AutoVue in a decompressed form.
30
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING FILES
File Properties
From the File menu, select Properties to open the Properties dialog. The Properties dialog provides information specific to the current active file, such as filename, file size, date of creation, and file type. The file properties that you can
view are:
Property Tab
Description
File Properties
Information specific to the current active file, such as filename, file
size, date of creation, file type, number of pages, and x, y & z
dimensions. It also indicates if the file is loaded from a streaming
file.
Resource
Information
Resources specific to the current active file, such as text font, shape
file, line style, and external reference files.
Native Properties
Custom properties for file types, such as last person who saved the
file, signature verification, and author comments.
DMS
If AutoVue is integrated with a backend DMS/PLM/ERP system, a
DMS tab appears that lists file attributes retrieved from the backend
system.
The Properties dialog varies for each file format that is open. As a result,
some property tabs may be absent when viewing a file.
NOTE:
Viewing File Properties
To view file properties:
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Properties dialog appears.
2.
To view the file properties, click the File Properties tab.
STEP RESULT: The File Properties tab displays the file name, file size, date last
modified, file type, and number of pages the document contains.
3.
To view resource information, click the Resource Information tab.
STEP RESULT: All included resources are listed in the Resource Information tab.
If a resource that is required to fully display the file is missing, it is listed with
the Missing Resource icon . If a resource is found it appears with the Found
Resource icon . If a required resource is missing and AutoVue substitutes it
with another resource, the Substituted Resources icon
appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
31
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
4.
To view native properties, click the Native Properties tab.
5.
Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages
AutoVue provides navigation buttons in the AutoVue toolbar to allow you to
flip through a drawing (for example, Office, 2D, EDA, or 3D files) that contains
multiple pages.
The navigation buttons appear by default. The toolbar contains frequently used
tools: Previous Page , Next Page , and Page Number .
You can also access the navigation buttons from the View menu by selecting
Page, and then the required navigation button.
Opening Agile Attachment Files
NOTE:
This section only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
You can view files from either the Attachments tab of a business object or from
the Files tabe of a file foder object.
When multiples files are displayed in AutoVue, use the document navigation buttons in the viewer toolbar to select the document that apperas in the
viewer window.
NOTE:
Viewing Files from Web Client, Attachments Tab
To view a file from Web Client, Attachments tab:
TASK
1.
32
Go to the attachments tab of a business object that references the file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
2.
Click the file name link in the attachments table.
•
If the attachemment row refers to a file folder with only one file,
AutoVue opens and displays that file.
•
If the attachment row refers to a multiple-file folder, each file is listed in
the File Name column. Click the file link to open a the file with AutoVue.
Viewing Files from Web Client, Files Tab
To view a file from Web Client, Files tab:
TASK
1.
Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the files to be
reviewed.
2.
Click the filename link in the file table.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the file.
Viewing Files from Java Client, Attachments Tab
To view a file from Java Client, Attachments tab:
TASK
1.
2.
Go to the Attachments tab of a business object that references the file.
Double-click the attachment row.
•
If the attachment row refers to a file folder with only one file, AutoVue
opens and displays the file.
•
If the attachment row refers to a multiple-file folder, the Select Files
window appears. Select one or more files to view and then click OK.
AutoVue opens and displays the files you selected.
Viewing Files from Java Client, Files Tab
To View a file from Java Client, Files tab:
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the files you want to
view.
33
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
2.
Double-click the filename in the file table.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the file.
Opening Agile Attachment Files form the Viewer Window
When the AutoVue window is open, you can use the viewer menus to select
additional Agile files. For many viewer functions this is a preferred method
when compared to pre-selecting the files in the Agile client.
The available AutoVue menu options that allow you to select another attachment file are as follows:
The list of available AutoVue menu selections for an Agile attachment file
varies. These menu options are dependent on the function originally selected in
the Agile PLM when AutoVue was opened (that is, View, Compare, or Overlay
were selected) and the file type of the currently viewed file. As a result, some of the
following menu options may not be available to choose in a specific viewer session.
NOTE:
•
File > Open URL
•
Analysis > Compare
•
File > Import File as Overlay (only available if a 2D file is active)
•
Analysis > Cross Probe
Selecting one of these menu options opens the File Open dialog. From this
dialog you can select a file to view or to add to the current analysis view. The
Agile Browse button in the dialog allows you to use your Agile bookmarks to
select a file. The Agile Search button in the dialog allows you to perform a quick
search and select a file.
Select an Attachment File
To use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
2.
34
Select an available Viewer menu option:
•
File > Open URL
•
Analysis > Compare
•
File > Import File as Overlay
•
Analysis > Cross Probe
Follow any dialog prompts until the File Open dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
3.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Browse.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you did not define any bookmarks in Agile PLM,
then the Agile Browse button does not appear in the File Open dialog.
STEP RESULT: The DMS: File Open dialog appears and displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree structures.
4.
Click + to expand a bookmark and display its item revision or its file
folder versions.
5.
Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view.
6.
From the DMS: File Open dialog, click OK.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the
selected file to the current analysis function.
Quick Search to Select an Attachment File
To perform a quick search to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
Choose an available Viewer menu option:
•
File > Open URL
•
Analysis > Compare
•
File > Import File as Overlay
•
Analysis > Cross Probe
2.
Follow any dialog prompts until the File Open dialog appears.
3.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Search.
STEP RESULT: The Search dialog appears.
4.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Search dialog, define your search and then click Search:
Option
Description
Class
Select an object class (for example, Items).
Search Parameter
Enter a text string or number.
Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and
the object Name or Description attribute. A Quick search
behaves similar to a Contains search for text strings. The
search criteria is treated as a single string and Agile PLM
searches for names or descriptions that contain the search
parameter string. In the case of ID numbers, Agile PLM
searches for a exact match. However, you may use wildcard
characters to specify part of an ID number as a search
criteria.
35
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
Option
Description
Search Attachment Content
Set this parameter to Yes in order to search the contents of
attachment files as well.
5.
From the Search Results table, click the + next to the object number to
expand the list of attachment files for the object.
6.
Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to review.
7.
Click Load File.
STEP RESULT: The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File
Open dialog.
8.
From the File open dialog, click OK.
RESULT:
AutoVue opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
Comparing Revisions or Versions of a File
AutoVue allows you to compare multiple revisions or versions of a file.
Compare Multiple Revisions of a File
To compare multiple item revisions of an attached file:
TASK
1.
From the item Attachments tab, select the file you want to compare.
2.
From the tab menu, select View.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the selected file.
3.
From the viewer menu, select Analysis and then Compare.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
4.
Select the Document Version checkbox.
5.
From the drop-down menu, select another revision of the file to
compare.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Only released item revisions appear in the drop-down
list. To compare the attachment of a pending revisions, view the pending revision and then use the Compare feature to select released revisions for
comparison.
36
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens the selected version in a second window and
displays the differences between the two files in a third window.
7.
To compare another revision, from the viewer menu, select File and
then Exit Compare.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to select another item revision.
Compare Multiple Versions of a File
To compare multiple file folder versions of a file:
TASK
1.
From the file folders File tab, select the file you want to compare.
2.
From the tab menu, select View.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the selected file.
3.
From the viewer menu, select Analysis and then Compare.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
4.
Select the Document Versions checkbox.
5.
From the drop down menu, select another file folder version of the file
for comparison.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens the selected version in a second window. A third
window displays the differences between the two files.
7.
To compare another file version, select File and then Exit Compare.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to select another file folder version.
Viewing Design Object Structures
When you open a CAD assembly file in a Design object, Agile PLM automatically opens the subordinate CAD part files in AutoVue, allowing you to view the
entire CAD design. Agile PLM uses the assembly structure (as defined in the
Structure tab of the Design object and the Structure tabs of its child Design
objects).
Viewing structured data in a Design data model class object relies on the
Structure tab to resolve related objects in the structure.
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
37
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
This process is seamless and requires no action by the user other than initiating
the view function for the assembly file.
The following list provides details on how Agile PLM extracts CAD Structure
files from the Design object and its Structure table for CAD design viewing:
•
The file type of the Design objects selected file must be designated as a
CAD Structure file type on the File Association tab of the Viewer & Files
node in Agile Administrator.
•
The structure used to extract files is explicitly set on the Design object
Structure tab.
•
Agile PLM identifies which Design object files to extract by the following
methods:
–
If the value of the File Category attribute from any file row of a child
Design matches the File Category value of the starting file, the file is
extracted.
–
If the selected starting Design object file has no value for Category,
then all files in all child Designs are extracted, including the starting
Design object.
•
If multiple file rows on a Design object structure have the same Category
value as the starting file, they are all extracted at any level in the tree.
•
If the user selects multiple Design object files and then selects View, then
each selected file is interpreted separately (based on Design structure
viewing logic).
•
When a Design object is from a business object’s Attachment tab, Agile
PLM uses the rules for viewing Designs. As a result, Design object viewing
rules are always applied to Design objects whether the viewing action is
initiated from a Design object or from the business object Attachments
tab.
Viewing Document Structured File Types
Viewing structured data in a File folder class object relies on the
DocuBOM or the Relationships tab to resolve related objects in the structure.
While this technique for viewing structured CAD files in DocuBOMs is still
supported, it has been superseded by Design structures as the preferred way for
storing and viewing data.
NOTE:
CAD data can be stored in Agile PLM using document object BOM structures.
This is accomplished automatically when Agile PLM and Engineering Collaboration (EC) are integrated using EC CAD connectors. A CAD assembly file is
attached to an Agile document object, and the subordinate CAD part files are
38
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
also attached to Agile document objects. The part file document objects appear
on the BOM tab of the CAD assembly document object, thus creating a hierarchical file structure for the attached files.
File types that are used in structured file hierarchy are specified in Agile
Administrator Viewer & Files node with the CAD Structure file association.
NOTE:
When you open a CAD Structure assembly attachment, Agile PLM automatically opens the subordinate part files in AutoVue, allowing you to view the
entire CAD design. This process is seamless and requires no action by the user
other than initiating the view function for the assembly file.
The follow list provides details on how Agile PLM extracts CAD Structure files
from the document BOM structure for CAD design viewing:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
•
Agile PLM extracts only file types specified as CAD Structure file types. If
an attached file type is not specified as a CAD Structure file type, Agile
PLM does not traverse the document structure to find other files.
•
If the file type is specified as a CAD Structure file type, then Agile PLM will
traverse all levels of the document hierarchy. It starts with the selected file
and then extracts other files necessary to build the complete model.
•
In order to avoid pulling out unnecessary files, the viewing logic makes use
of the Attachment Type attribute on the document’s Attachments tab. If
there is a value in this attribute (such as SOURCE) for the originally
selected file attachment, then only files whose Attachment Type attribute
matches this value will be extracted. If there is no value in the Attachment
Type attribute, then all files within the structure hierarchy will be
extracted.
•
If there are multiple file attachments with the matching value of Attachment Type on the same document, they will be extracted and sent to
AutoVue. This includes the document from which the view operation was
initiated.
•
If any given document in the hierarchy does not have any file attachments,
or any with the correct value of Attachment Type, then the extraction
process continues down the tree.
•
The Agile administrator may have configured Agile PLM to use the CAD
Revision BOM attribute. This is used by standard Agile EC CAD connectors to provide an As Saved fixed BOM resolution for CAD designs. If
enabled, when viewing a past revision of a design object, it appears in the
same state as when it was last saved. If disabled, view of the design may
differ if child components were revisioned (that is, standard Agile BOM
resolution logic is followed).
•
You can select any document revision for viewing (including a pending
revision). If the CAD Revision attribute is enabled, when viewing a
39
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
pending revision, all active pending revisions that were saved from CAD
will be displayed within the structure.
•
All AutoVue operations support CAD Structure file types, including:
View, Markup, Compare, Cross Probe, and Overlay.
Using the Version Browser
When a File Folder object is open in Web Client, you can view object version
information by selecting View All Versionsfrom the Action menu.
When a Design object is open, you can view Design version/revision information by selecting View All Versions from the Action menu.
Switching Versions of a Design Object in Web Client
To switch between versions of a Design object in Web Client, from the Version
drop-down list at the top of the Design object, select the version/revision you
want to view.
A version number in brackets (for example, [4]) indicates a version that
has not yet been checked in. That is, for example, when version 3 was checked out,
a pending version [4] was created. Selecting [4] from the drop-down list allows
you to view and work with the pending version.
NOTE:
Select View All Version from the Actions menu to open the Versions palette.
The View All Versions action is only available in Web Client. Java Client
does not support Design objects.
NOTE:
The Version palette displays the following information about each version:
Version Columns
40
Description
Column 1
Displays the approval status of the file folder version.The approval
status is displayed only if there are approvers on the Routing Slip.
Version
The version number.
Checkin Date
Checking User
The date the version was checked in and the user who performed the
checking.
Change Info
Indicates how the version was modified before it was checked in.
Files indicate that the object's files were modified; for example, files
were replaced, added, or deleted.
For Design objects, Structure indicates that the Design's Structure tab
was modified.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
Version Columns
Label, Revision,
Revision Date
Description
These are version-specific editable fields used primarily with Design
data model objects.
Initiating Actions in the Versions Palette
The following are actions you can initiate in the Versions palette:
•
View: Click the View drop-down menu to choose one of the following
options:
–
View: Select any version row and click View to view the file or files
in AutoVue.
–
Compare: For single file versions, select two versions rows and then
select Compare form the View drop-down list. AutoVue compares
the selected files.
Initiating Actions from the Design Object Version Palette
To initiate actions from the Design object Version palette:
•
Comparison Report: (Design objects only) Click the Comparison
Report drop-down menu to select one of the following options:
–
Compare: Select any two version rows and click Compare to
compare the Designs in the Comparison Report drop-down menu.
A Design Comparison Chart displays a comparison report.
–
Comparison by Search: Select a version row and click Compare by
Search in the Comparison report drop-down list. A Compare by
Search palette opens. In the drop-down list select either Latest
Version or All Versions. Enter a search string (enter * to search for
any design object) and execute a quick search. Choose from a list of
Designs to compare with the original Design object. The Design
Comparison Chart displays a comparison report.
–
Design Comparison Chart: The Design Comparison Chart displays
reports of the compared Design objects. The plus sign expands the
Design object to display a list of child objects attached to it. You can
collapse the object using the minus sign. Click the grey dot icon to
see more details about Attributes and Files. Colors indicate the state
of the Design object.
For example, Blue - Added, Orange - Modified, Red - Deleted.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
41
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
•
Purge Version: Design objects store large CAD files, which are updated
regularly. The Purge Version action allows you to remove unwanted
Design versions and help optimize file storage. To begin the process, the
Design object needs to be in the checked in state. Purging starts at the original version and continues down the Structure tab, and goes through all
the versions, including the child objects. The process stops if you cannot
purge a child object.
Accessing Different File Versions from the Business Object Attachments
Tab
You can get, open, view, and print any version of an attachment file from the
Attachments tab of the business object.
You can easily access history without clicking through to the File Folder object.
This is useful when a single file is being modified and accessed by multiple
people/different functions. For instance, user can easily trace and identify in
which versions another user made their edits - this is identified from version
create date and checkout user.
The Versions dialog displays, for each version, the Version Creation Date (date
the version was created), whether that version has redlines (indicated by the Has
Been Redlined icon), and the Checkout User (user who created that version).
This allows you to easily see the history of an attachment from the Attachments
tab, including who modified the file, and when it was modified.
Switching Between File Folders Version in Web Client
To switch between versions of file folders from an object’s Attachments tab in
Web Client:
TASK
1.
From the Attachments tab, select the required attachment row.
2.
From the tab menu, select Menu and then View Versions.
STEP RESULT: The Versions dialog appears.
3.
From the Versions dialog, select the required row, then select the Get,
View or Print from the dialog menu.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Optionally, select two version rows, and then choose
Compare or Overlay from the View action button drop-down menu.
42
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
Switching Between File Folders Version in Java Client
To switch between versions of file folders from an object’s Attachments tab in
Java Client:
TASK
1.
From the Attachments tab, select the required attachment row.
2.
Click Show Versions.
STEP RESULT: The Versions dialog appears.
3.
Select the version rows that you want to access.
4.
Click the appropriate action (Get, Open, View, or Print).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Optionally, click the Has Been Redlined icon to open
AutoVue and to display the redlines. Select two version rows, then select
either Compare or Overlay from the View action drop-down menu.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
43
AUTOVUE BASICS
OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES
44
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
4
Comparing Files
NOTE:
This section only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
In Agile, a file comparison is initiated from either the File tab of the File Folders
or from the Attachments tab of business objects.
NOTE: For detailed information on file comparison features, refer to the
“Comparing 2D Files” on page 67, “Comparing a PCB with Artwork” on page 115,
and “Comparing 3D Files” on page 174.
Note that Markups (redlines) and comparing Office formats are not supported
in AutoVue Compare mode.
Comparing Files in Web Client and Java Client
You can select and compare two files from a single file folder Files tab or a single
business object Attachments tab.
To initiate comparing files:
TASK
1.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
2.
Select the files you want to compare and then select one of the
following:
•
For Web Client, select View and then Compare.
•
For Java Client, select View File(s) and then Compare.
RESULT:
The file and the comparison results display in a single viewer window.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
45
COMPARING FILES
COMPARING FILES BY SEARCH
Comparing Files by Search
The Compare Files by Search attribute allows you to:
•
Compare files from different released revisions of an item.
•
Compare files from different file folder versions.
•
Select any file on any business object Attachments tab or on any file folder
Files tab, and then search for a file to use for comparison.
Depending on your search, you can select a business object, and then select a file
from the list of related files for that object. Or, if you have the appropriate privileges, you can search for file folder objects, and then select a file from the list of
related files for the selected file folder.
For item objects, introductory revisions and unreleased pending revisions
do not appear in the related files list.
NOTE:
Initiating a File Compare by Search
To initiate a file compare by search:
TASK
1.
2.
Display the Attachments tab or Files tab.
Select a file row you want to work with and choose:
9.2.1.x or 9.2.2.x Web Client: View > By Search > Compare
•
•
9.3.x Web Client: View > Compare By Search (A search dialog allows
you to search for the object.)
•
Java Client: View File(s) > By Search > Compare
STEP RESULT: The Compare Files By Search dialog appears with three search
tabs.
3.
46
The search dialog allows you to search for any business object (for
example items or manufacturer parts) and select the attachments of
those objects to compare. User any of the following search methods:
•
Search tab lets you create a simple search or an advanced search. You
can check to search attachment contents, too.
•
Saved Searches tab opens to your navigation pane where you can
browse in search folders, select a search, and run it. Again, returned
results may be moved to the Selected Items table, and click OK.
•
Shortcuts tab opens to your navigation pane where you can select
objects from My Bookmarks or Recently Visited. The system displays
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
COMPARING FILES
INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE
shortcuts to only those objects that are appropriate to the operation
you are performing.
STEP RESULT: Only business objects with attached files appear in the search
results table. For example, a business object that you viewed recently will not
appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has no attachments.
4.
5.
When the results of your search are returned, select a row in the results
table, and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files
table.
In the Related Files table, select the file you want:
•
If the selected search object is a file folder, use the Version drop-down
list in the Related Files table to select the file folder version you want.
•
If the selected search object is an item, in the Related Files table displays
item attachments for each released revision of the item (the file name
followed by the revision number or letter, for example, widget.dwg - A
and widget.dwg - B).
NOTE: For item objects, Introductory revisions and unreleased pending
revisions do not appear in the related files list.
•
6.
If the selected search object is a business object, select the Show
Matching File Types Only checkbox to display only the related files
that are the same file type as the file with which you want to compare.
When finished, click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can continue to run multiple searches or shortcuts until you are finished selecting the attachments you want.
RESULT:
The files and the comparison results appear in a single viewer window.
Initiate Compare in AutoVue
The following sections describe how to initiate a compare in AutoVue.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
47
COMPARING FILES
INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE
Initiating Compare in AutoVue
To initiate comparing files in AutoVue:
TASK
1.
View an appropriate file for compare.
2.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
3.
Select a file row you want to work with and choose:
•
Web Client: View > View
•
Java Client: View Files (s)
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the selected file.
4.
In the AutoVue Analysis menu, choose Compare.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
5.
Use one of the following File Open dialog methods to select a file to
compare:
•
Browse to browse your local directories to select and open files from the
AutoVue window.
•
Agile Browse to use Agile bookmarks to open files from the AutoVue
window.
•
Agile Search to perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files
from the AutoVue window.
Selecting a File From Local Directory
You can select an attachment file by browsing your local directories:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Browse.
2.
Use the Look in drop-down list to select the directory you want.
3.
Select the file you want and click Open.
4.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
STEP RESULT: The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the
selected file to the current analysis function.
48
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
COMPARING FILES
INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE
Selecting a File from Agile Bookmarks
To use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Browse.
STEP RESULT: The DMS: File Open dialog appears and displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree structure
If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM, the Agile
Browse button does not appear in the File Open dialog.
NOTE:
2.
Click + to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file
folder versions.
3.
Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view.
4.
Click OK in the DMS: File Open dialog. The selected file name appears
in the File Name field of the File Open dialog.
5.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
Selecting a File with Agile Search
You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open Dialog, click Agile Search.
STEP RESULT: The Search dialog appears.
2.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Search dialog, define your search with the following options
and then click Search:
Option
Description
Class
Select an object class. For example, Items.
49
COMPARING FILES
INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE
Option
Description
Search Parameter
Enter a text string or a number.
Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the
object Name or Description attribute. A Quick search behaves
like a Contains search for text strings. The search criteria is
treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or
descriptions that contain the search parameter string. In the
case of ID numbers, Agile PLM searches for an exact match,
however, you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an
ID number as a search criteria.
Search Attachment
Content
Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the
attachment files as well.
3.
In the Search Results table, click the + next to the object number to
expand the list of attachment files for that object.
4.
Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view.
5.
Click Load File. The selected file name appears in the File Name field of
the File Open dialog.
6.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
50
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
5
Working With 2D Files
When working with vector and non-vector 2D files in AutoVue, you can
instantly change how the active file is displayed in the workspace by choosing
from a number of different view options. For example, you can zoom into an
area of the drawing, magnify a part of the drawing, and rotate a file’s orientation
clockwise/counterclockwise.
When viewing 2D vector files, you have access to entity information, views
saved in the drawing, and the ability to “intelligent snap” when performing
measurements. All the information is obtained by AutoVue by referencing
various sources; either internal files or external reference files that are located
outside the file.
In addition to the features mentioned, this chapter provides detailed information on how you can modify AutoVue to suit your needs and preferences
through a broad range of configuration options.
Searching Text
You can perform a text search on 2D vector and text-based documents.
AutoVue provides search options that you can use to customize a search. These
options are as follows:
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
You cannot perform a text search on raster files.
51
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
2D VIEWING OPTIONS
Option
Description
Match Whole Word Only
Match a complete word.
Match Case
Search for a word or text string with specific
capitalization.
Up
Search backward in the document.
Down
Search forward in the document.
TASK
1.
From the Edit menu, select Find Text.
STEP RESULT: The Find dialog appears.
2.
Enter the word or phrase that you want to find in the Find What field.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you are searching in a vector file, select a text string
from the list.
3.
You can refine your search by selecting Match Whole Word Only or
Match Case.
4.
Click Find Next.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue highlights the text and zooms into the text area. For PDF
files, AutoVue highlights the text but maintains the current zoom level.
5.
Click Close to close the Find dialog.
2D Viewing Options
From the View menu, you can change how the active file is displayed in the
workspace. For example, you can zoom into an area of the drawing, magnify a
part of the drawing, and rotate a file’s orientation clockwise/counterclockwise.
You can access these options from the View menu. The options are:
52
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
2D VIEWING OPTIONS
Menu
Zoom
Sub-Menu
Zoom Box
Description
Click and drag to draw a box
around an object that you
want to enlarge to fill the
window.
From the Autovue toolbar,
you can also click
or
right-click in work-space
and select from pop-up
menu.
Zoom In
Zoom in by a factor of 2.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
Zoom Out
Zoom out by a factor of 2.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
Zoom Previous
.
.
Reverts to the previous
zoom level.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
You can also right-click the
workspace and select Zoom Previous.
Full Resolution
Display the file at full
resolution.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
.
53
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
2D VIEWING OPTIONS
Menu
Fit
Sub-Menu
Description
Horizontal
Fit the image horizontally in
the active window. The
vertical dimensions of the
image are zoomed
proportionally but may be
too large or small for the
window.
You can also right-click the
workspace and select Zoom Page Width.
Vertical
Fit the image vertically in
the active window. The
horizontal dimensions of
the image are zoomed
proportionally but may be
too large or small for the
window.
Both
AutoVue finds the best fit
for the current file with
respect to both its vertical
and horizontal dimensions.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
Resizing the AutoVue
window when an image in
the workspace has been zoom
fitted (Horizontal, Vertical
or Both) results in the
proportional resizing of the
image.
NOTE:
you can also click
.
You can also right-click the
workspace and select Zoom Fit.
Pan and Zoom Window
Display a close-up view of a
particular area of a file while
maintaining a view of the
entire file.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
The Pan and Zoom Window
option is disabled for
text-based documents and
spreadsheets.
See “Using the Pan and
Zoom Window” for more
information.
Pan
Click and drag to move the
drawing. To exit right-click.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
NOTE:
54
.
The Rotate option is disabled for archived files, text-based documents and spreadsheets.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
2D VIEWING OPTIONS
Menu
Rotate
Sub-Menu
Rotate Clockwise
Description
Rotate the file 90 degrees
clockwise.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
Rotate Counter Clockwise
.
Rotate the file 90 degrees
counter clockwise.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
Using the Pan and Zoom Window
The Pan and Zoom Window view option allows a close-up view of a particular
area of a file while maintaining a full view of the file. The Pan and Zoom
Window displays a miniature version of the file and has a movable box frame
on top of the miniature to indicate the area of the file displayed in the AutoVue
workspace.
The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text-based documents
and spreadsheets.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select Pan and Zoom Window.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Pan and
Zoom Window .
STEP RESULT: The Pan and Zoom window appears displaying a full view of the
file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
From the Options menu, select Dynamic to view the changes in “real
time”.
3.
To view a close-up of a specific area of the file in the AutoVue workspace, minimize the frame box by clicking and dragging the frame
handles.
55
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
4.
To view a different area of the file in the AutoVue workspace, click and
drag the frame box to the area that you want to view.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you perform a zoom function in the AutoVue workspace, the area displayed in the workspace is highlighted by the frame box in
the Pan and Zoom Window.
5.
From the Pan and Zoom menu, select Exit to close the window.
RESULT:
The last view performed remains in the AutoVue workspace.
Working with 2D Vector Files
In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files, AutoVue
provides the ability to access entity information, access views saved in the
drawing, and the ability to “intelligent snap” when performing measurements.
AutoVue references various sources to obtain all data required to completely
and accurately display vector files. These sources can be internal to the file—like
layers, blocks, and overlays—or external reference files (XRefs) that are located
outside the file.
Manipulating 2D Vector Files
The Manipulate menu option allows you to manipulate how the current active
file is displayed. For example, you can select which layers, blocks, and external
reference files (XRefs) to display.
The Manipulate menu options are:
56
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Menu
Visibility Control
Sub-Menu
Layers
Description
Select and display different
layers of a drawing.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
See “Displaying Layers” for
more information.
Blocks
Select and display a block
from a drawing.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
See “Selecting Blocks” for
more information.
XRefs
Overlays
Select the XRefs to display
in the drawing.
See “Displaying XRefs” for
more information.
Select an overlay to modify.
See “Adding an Overlay” for
more information.
Displaying Layers
Use this option to configure the layers to display of the current active file.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears listing the layers
and layer visibility for the current active file.
2.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To sort the list of layers in the dialog, click Name to sort alphabetically
or numerically, or click Status to sort by visibility.
57
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
3.
4.
You can modify the visibility of a layer or layers by doing one of the
following:
•
Deselect/select the Status check box beside the layers that you want to
hide/display.
•
Click All On to display all the layers or click All Off to hide all the layers.
•
Select a layer from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide/display the
layer.
Click OK to close the dialog and to apply your changes.
Selecting Blocks
Use this option to select a block to display from the current active file.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Blocks.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Blocks
.
STEP RESULT: The Select a Block to Display dialog appears listing the blocks for
the current active file.
2.
From the list, select the block that you want to display.
3.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The selected block is displayed.
Displaying XRefs
AutoVue references various sources to obtain all the data required to
completely and correctly display files. These sources can be internal to the file,
like layers and blocks. External reference files (XRefs) are located outside the
file.
Use the XRefs option to display the external references of the current active file.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
XRefs.
STEP RESULT: The Select the External References to Display dialog appears
listing the external reference files associated with the current active file.
58
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
2.
You can modify the visibility of the XRefs by doing one of the following:
•
Deselect/select the Status check box beside the XRef that you want to
hide/display.
•
Click All On to display all the XRefs or click All Off to hide all the XRefs.
•
Select a XRef from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide/display the
XRef.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Raster XRefs cannot be toggled on/off for AutoCAD
and MicroStation drawings.
3.
Click OK to close the Select the External References to Display dialog.
RESULT:
The selected XRefs are displayed.
Displaying Details About Resources
Resource information for a file is displayed in the left of the AutoVue status bar.
If a file is missing resources the Missing Resource icon appears to the left of the
AutoVue status bar. These missing resources can be XRefs, text fonts, linestyles,
or shape files. If a missing resource has been substituted for another resource,
the Substituted Resource icon
appears.
In order to correctly display a file, you must make sure all required
resources are provided to AutoVue.
NOTE:
See “Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon” for information on missing
XRefs.
TASK
1.
Click the Missing Resource icon
on the AutoVue status bar.
or the Substituted Resource icon
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the File menu, you can also select Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Resource Informationtab to display details about missing or
substituted resource information required to properly display this file.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: A green check mark indicates the resources that
AutoVue is able to access. A red indicates that resources are not accessible.
A yellow exclamation mark
indicates that a missing resource has been
substituted for another resource.
3.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
59
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Overlaying Files in Web Client and Java Client
You can overlay files from the Attachments/Files tabs by selecting
View>Overlay or View File(s)>Overlay from the Web Client and Java Client,
respectively. Alternately, from the Java Client, you can initiate overlaying files
with the By Search feature:
TASK
1.
2.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
Select a file row you want to work with and choose:
9.2.2.x or 9.2.1.x Web Client: View > By Search > Overlay.
•
•
The View Files by Search dialog appears, with three Search tabs.
9.3.x Web Client: View.
•
The file opens in AutoVue, then choose File > Import File as Overlay.
Java Client: View File(s) > By Search > Overlay.
The Select Files dialog appears, with three Search tabs.
3.
The search dialog allows you to search for any business object (for
example, items or manufacturer parts) and select the attachments of
those objects to use to overlay. Use any of the following search
methods:
Tab
Description
Search
Create a simple search or an advanced search. You can also check to search
attachment contents.
Saved
Searches
Opens to your navigation pane where you can browse in search folders,
select a search, and run it. Again, returned results may be moved to the
Selected Items table, and click OK.
Shortcuts
Opens to your navigation pane where you can select objects from My
Bookmarks or Recently Visited. The system displays shortcuts to only
those objects that are appropriate to the operation you are performing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Only business objects with attached files appear in
the search results table. For example, a business object that you viewed
recently will not appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has
no attachments.
60
4.
When the results of your search are returned, select a row in the Results
table, and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files
table.
5.
In the Related Files table, select and move attachments to the Selected
Files table.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
6.
You can continue to run multiple searches or shortcuts until you are
finished selecting the attachments you want.
7.
When you are finished, click OK.
RESULT:
The files are displayed in a single viewer window, one on top of the other.
Initiate Overlay in AutoVue
The following sections describe how to initiate an overlay in AutoVue.
Initiating Overlay in AutoVue
To initiate overlaying files in AutoVue:
TASK
1.
Select and view an appropriate file. That is, a file type that can be used
for overlay analysis.
2.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
3.
Select a file row you want to work with and then choose:
Web Client: View > View
•
•
Java Client: View File(s)
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the selected file.
4.
From the AutoVue menu, choose Import File as Overlay.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
5.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Use one of the following File Open dialog options to select a file to
overlay:
Option
Description
Browse
Browse your local directories to select and open files from the AutoVue
window.
Agile Browse
Use Agile bookmarks to open files from the AutoVue window.
Agile Search
Perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files from the AutoVue
window.
61
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Browsing Local Directories to Select File
You can browse your local directories to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Browse.
2.
Use the Look in drop-down list to select the directory you want.
3.
Select the file you want and click Open.
4.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
Using Agile Bookmarks to Select File
You can click Agile Browse to use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment
file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Browse.
STEP RESULT: The DMS: File Open dialog displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree
structure.
If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM, Agile Browse
does not appear in the File Open dialog.
NOTE:
2.
Click + to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file
folder versions.
3.
Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view.
4.
Click OK in the DMS: File Open dialog.
STEP RESULT: The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File
Open dialog.
5.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
62
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Using Agile Search to Select File
You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Search.
STEP RESULT: The Search dialog appears.
2.
Define your search using the following options and then click Search.
Option
Description
Class
Select an object class, for example, Items.
Search Parameter
Enter a text string or a number.
Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the
object Name or Description attribute. A Quick search behaves
like a Contains search for text strings. The search criteria is
treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or
descriptions that contain the search parameter string. In the
case of ID numbers, Agile PLM searches for an exact match,
however, you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an
ID number as a search criteria.
Search Attachment
Content
Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the
attachment files as well.
3.
In the Search Results table, click the + next to the object number to
expand the list of attachment files for that object.
4.
Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view.
5.
Click Load File.
STEP RESULT: The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File
Open dialog.
6.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
Adding an Overlay
When working with 2D files, you can overlay other files over the current active
file. You can also adjust an overlay, move an overlay, and scale an overlay by
defining the X and Y coordinates and the scaling factor.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
63
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
When working with a raster file, it should be used as the base file because raster
formats are opaque and would hide files underneath them.
TASK
1.
Open the file that you want to use as the base file for the overlay.
2.
From the File menu, select Import File as Overlay.
STEP RESULT: The Overlays dialog appears.
3.
Click Add File.
STEP RESULT: The Please Select an Overlay File dialog appears.
4.
Select a file to overlay and then click Open.
5.
To add another file, repeat steps 3 through 4.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can hide/display certain overlays by
selecting/deselecting corresponding check boxes in the Visibility column.
6.
When done, click OK to close the Overlays dialog.
RESULT:
The base file is displayed with the selected overlay files on top of it.
Modifying an Overlay
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Overlays.
STEP RESULT: The Modify Overlay dialog appears.
2.
Select the overlay that you want to modify.
3.
Click the Action that you want to apply to the overlay.
4.
Click Move if you want to move the overlay. Click a point on the base
file where you want to set the lower left corner of the overlay. Click
another point where you want to set the upper right corner of the
overlay.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: As you select the point to define the position of the
upper right corner, you can resize the destination box.
5.
Click Scale if you want to resize the overlay. Enter the XOffset and
YOffset coordinates and/or the Scale Factor.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing
and all options are displayed at their current values.
64
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
6.
Click Warp to adjust the overlay. Click a point on the overlay and drag
the cursor to where you want the overlay starting point. Click another
point and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay to end.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The overlay’s size is scaled to accommodate the origin
and destination points you defined
7.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To modify other overlays, repeat steps 2 to 4.
STEP RESULT: The changes are applied to the selected overlay.
Removing an Overlay
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Import File as Overlay.
STEP RESULT: The Overlays dialog appears.
2.
Select the overlay that you want to remove.
3.
Click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The overlay is removed from the list.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The overlay is removed from the display.
Selecting Views
The Views option allows you to access different named views of a file.
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select Views.
STEP RESULT: The Select a Named View dialog appears.
2.
From the list, select the view that you want to display.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The selected view is displayed.
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To return to the default view, select Default View.
65
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Specifying a View Point
The View Point option allows you to render a drawing from a selected viewpoint.
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select View Points.
STEP RESULT: The View Point dialog appears.
2.
Enter the X, Y and Z coordinates for the view point with which you want
to render the drawing.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The drawing is displayed from the selected view point.
Analyzing 2D Vector Files
With the analysis functionality, you can measure entities, compare two files, or
view drawing information. These options are available under the Analysis
menu.
The following table lists all the options from the Analysis menu:
Menu
Measure
Sub-Menu
Description
Measure the distance, area,
angle, and arc of an entity.
From the AutoVue toolbar,
you can also click
.
See also “Measuring in 2D
Files for more information.
Compare
66
Compare two files.
See “Comparing 2D Files”
for more information.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Menu
Show Drawing Information
Sub-Menu
Description
Select Single Entity
Displays information for the
selected entity.
See also “Viewing Details of
a Single Entity for more
information.
List Tags/Attributes
List block attributes and
tags.
See also “Viewing
Tags/Attributes for more
information.
Entity Information
View information of a set of
entities.
See also “Viewing
Information for a Set of
Entitiesfor more
information.
Comparing 2D Files
AutoVue provides the ability to visually compare two files and display
color-coded comparative data. Generally when comparing two files, you should
first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older
version.
When comparing files, AutoVue displays three windows:
•
The right window displays the newer version of the document.
•
The left window displays the older version of the document.
•
The bottom window displays the comparison results.
By default, the result windows display added, deleted, and unchanged entities.
In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display
only the additions, deletions or unchanged, or any combination of the three. To
access these options, right-click in any window and select an option from the
pop-up menu. By default, the Comparison Result window displays the
unchanged, deleted, and added information.
The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical
comparison.
NOTE:
The comparison results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the
results of the file comparison. The comparison options and corresponding
colors are:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
67
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Option
Color
Description
View Additions
Green
Displays data that is present
in the newer file but not in
the older file.
View Deletions
Red
Displays data that is missing
in the newer file but present
in the older file.
View Unchanged
Blue
Indicates that there is no
change between the newer
file and old file.
TASK
1.
View the newer file in AutoVue.
2.
From the Analysis menu, select Compare.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
3.
Enter the file name or browse to select the file that you want to
compare with the newer file.
4.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you apply a change from the View menu, all three
windows display the synchronized change.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays three windows, the first displaying the newer
file, the second displaying the older file and the third displaying the comparison results.
5.
To access the Compare options, right-click in any of the windows.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To maximize any of the windows, click the
button
on the title bar of the window that you want to maximize. To minimize, click
the
button. To restore the window, click the
button.
STEP RESULT: A menu appears displaying the Compare options.
6.
When comparing AutoCAD files, you can view a file without viewports.
To do so, from the View menu, select View Without Viewports.
7.
To maximize any of the windows, double-click the title bar of the
window that you want to maximize. To restore the window,
double-click the title bar.
8.
To exit Compare mode, from the File menu, select Exit Compare.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Exit
Compare Mode .
RESULT:
68
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
The newer file appears in the workspace.
Align and Scale
You can scale or translate a file in order to compare files accurately. With the
Align and Scale option you can select to automatically align the files, select
points to align and scale, modify the coordinates (XOffset and YOffset) or enter
a scaling factor for the second file.
TASK
1.
While in Compare mode, from the View menu, select Align and Scale.
STEP RESULT: The Align and Scale dialog appears.
2.
Select one of the following options:
Option
Description
Automatic
AutoVue selects the best fit for the two files.
Select Points to Align
Select snapping points to align to.
Select Points to Align
and Scale
Select snapping points to align and scale to.
Custom
You can enter a scale factor as well as X and Y offset values;
XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all
options are displayed at their current values.
3.
Click Apply.
STEP RESULT: The align and scale modifications are applied to the file in the
second window.
4.
Click OK to the close the Align and Scale dialog.
Drawing Information
The Drawing Information option is only available with AutoCAD and MicroStation drawings, and is accessed from the Analysis menu. The Drawing Information options available are: Select Single Entity, List Tags/Attributes, and
Entity Information.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
69
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES
Viewing Details of a Single Entity
The Select Single Entity option allows you to view information of a single entity.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Drawing Information, and then
select Select Single Entity.
2.
Click the entity for which you want to view information.
3.
If you did not select an entity, a message appears informing you that no
entities were found and prompts you to select again.
4.
The Get Entity Info dialog appears displaying the information for the
selected entity. The Extended Data (XData) button appears if additional
information exists for that entity. Click XData to view the information.
5.
Click OK to close the Get Entity Info dialog.
Viewing Tags/Attributes
The List Tag/Attributes option allows you to view information on block attributes and tags.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Drawing Information, and then
select List Tags/Attributes.
2.
Click in the area of the file for which you want to view information on
block attributes and tags.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If there are no entities within the selected box, a
message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you
to select again.
STEP RESULT: The Block Attributes dialog appears displaying the attributes/tags
for the selected entity.
3.
Click OK to close the Block Attributes dialog.
Viewing Information for a Set of Entities
The Entity Information option allows you to view information of a set of entities
contained in a specific area of a drawing.
TASK
1.
70
From the Analysis menu, select Show Drawing Information, and then
select Entity Information.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH PDF FILES
2.
Click and drag to highlight the entities for which you want to view
entity information.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If there are no entities within the selected area, a
message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you
to select again. To exit, right-click the mouse anywhere in the workspace.
STEP RESULT: The List Entities dialog appears displaying the information of all
the selected entities.
3.
Click OK to close the List Entities dialog.
Working with PDF Files
This section lists AutoVue features that are specific to Adobe PDF files.
Navigating Through PDF Files
When navigating through a PDF file you can use the mouse-wheel to zoom and
to scroll. For a single page PDF, the mouse wheel is used to zoom in and out of
a document. For a multi-page PDF, the mouse wheel is used to scroll from page
to page.
Navigating Through Markups
When navigating through markups, AutoVue preserves the current zoom level.
For example, when the Go To feature is selected from the Markup Navigation
tree, AutoVue highlights the markup entity in the workspace (AutoVue navigates to markup entity if on a different page) and maintains the current zoom
level.
Measuring in PDF Files
When measuring vector-based PDFs, AutoVue allows you to snap to certain
entities to take measurements. You can snap to the end-points or mid-points of
an entity. AutoVue also allows you to snap to shapes (closed entities) for area
measurements. This option also applies when adding a Markup Measure entity
to the PDF file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
71
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
WORKING WITH PDF FILES
NOTE:
For Angle and Arc entities, only 3-point snapping is available.
See “Measuring in 2D Files”
See “Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities”
Text Search
You can perform a text search in vector-based PDF files where the scanner
performs Optical Character Recognition (OCR). AutoVue highlights the text
search result in the workspace and maintains the current document zoom level.
If the text is very small, AutoVue zooms in to the highlighted text. If the text if
outside the visible workspace area, AutoVue scrolls/pans to display the highlighted text.
See “Searching Text”
Text Selection/Copy
You can select and copy text from a vector-based PDF file where the scanner
performs Optical Character Recognition (OCR).
To do so, highlight the text and then select Copy from the Edit menu (alternately, you can use the shortcut key Ctrl+C). You can then paste the text to the
Note markup entity or a third-party application (for example, MS Word).
Note the following behaviors when copying text from a PDF file in
AutoVue:
NOTE:
72
•
It may not be possible to copy text if the PDF file has a security restriction.
•
When copying text from PDF files, AutoVue displays the text as it appears
in the PDF. That is, AutoVue inserts a line break if text continues to a next
line (word wrapping) in the PDF.
•
In some PDF files, when copying text that includes line spaces, AutoVue
may not insert the spaces. This is because the line spaces are not saved in
the PDF file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
Measuring in 2D Files
AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 2D files. Measurement options vary between vector and non-vector files.
•
For vector files, AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to fixed points on
the drawing.
•
For non-vector files, the Snapping Modes option is disabled. However,
you can free snap to any point on the drawing.
AutoVue provides several measure options that you can choose from.You can
access the measure options from Analysis menu and selecting Measure, or
from the AutoVue toolbar, click Measure .
The measure options are as follows:
Name
Description
Distance
Measure the distance between two points.
See “Distance in non-Vector Files”
“Distance in Vector Files”
Area
Measure selected area.
See “Area in non-Vector Files”
“Area in Vector Files”
Angle
Measure the angle between selected points
or between two lines.
See “Angle in non-Vector Files”
“Angle in Vector Files”
Arc
Measure an arc entity.
See “Arc in non-Vector Files”
“Arc in Vector Files”
2D Vector Snapping Modes
The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points
on a drawing. For example, if you select Snap to End-Point and you move the
cursor over an end-point of a line, the end-point will be highlighted by a snap
box.
The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid, center, and end-points of an
entity:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
73
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
Button
Snap to
Description
End-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near a linear component’s end point.
Mid-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear
component.
Center-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical
component.
Free snap
Allow snapping at any point on the drawing.
When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all
snapping modes (All On) or to turn off snapping modes (All Off)
NOTE:
The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements:
Measurement
Snapping Location
Area
Snaps to a shape on the drawing.
Arc
Snaps to an arc on the drawing.
Angle
Snap to two non-parallel lines.
Distance in non-Vector Files
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Distance tab.
3.
In the Measure Distance Units list, select a unit of measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to measure the distance along a path,
select the Cumulative check box.
74
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
4.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
5.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected Cumulative, continue clicking points
along the path that you want to measure.
6.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by a line. The measured distance, Delta-X,
and Delta-Y appear in their respective fields in Distance tab.
7.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Distance in Vector Files
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Distance tab.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
4.
To select all snapping modes click All On. To clear all snapping modes
click All Off.
5.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the units of measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to measure the distance along a path,
select Cumulative.
6.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
7.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected Cumulative, continue clicking points
along the path that you want to measure.
8.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by a line. The Measured Distance, Delta-X,
and Delta-Y appear in the Measurement dialog.
9.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
75
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
Area in non-Vector Files
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Area tab.
3.
In the Area Units list, select a unit of measurement in which to measure
the area of the region.
4.
In the Perimeter Units list, select a unit of measurement in which to
measure the perimeter of the region.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: In the Net Area Result group, select Add to cumulate
a net area result of different areas, select Subtract to subtract an area from the
net area result, and select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field.
5.
76
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
6.
Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the region you want
to measure.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line. The area and perimeter measurements appear in their respective fields in the Area tab.
7.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
8.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Area in Vector Files
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Area tab.
3.
Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points
on a drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring:See “2D
Vector Snapping Modes” for more information.
Option
Descriptions
All On
Select all snapping modes.
All Off
Clear all snapping modes.
5.
Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on
the drawing.
6.
From the Measured Area Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the area.
7.
From the Perimeter Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the perimeter.
8.
To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas, click Add.
9.
To subtract an area from the Net Area Result, click Subtract.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
77
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
10.
If you selected Between Points, click points on the drawing to define
the area.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line. The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog.
11.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
12.
If you selected Shape, click the edge of the predefined shape.
STEP RESULT: The shape is highlighted and the area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog.
13.
Click Reset to take another measurement.
14.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Angle in non-Vector Files
Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Angle tab.
3.
Select a unit of measurement from the Units list.
4.
Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them. The angle
measurement appears in the Angle tab.
5.
78
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
Angle in Vector Files
Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Angle tab.
3.
From the Angle Definition section, select one of the following:
•
From 3 Points: Measure the angle between three points.
•
Between 2 Lines: Measure the angle between two non-parallel lines.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
5.
To select all snapping modes click All On, To deselect all snapping
modes click All Off. See “2D Vector Snapping Modes” for more information.
6.
Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two
lines.
7.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit.
8.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points on the drawing to
define the angle.
9.
If you selected Between 2 Lines, click two lines on the drawing to
define the angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them. The angle
measurement appears in the Measurement dialog.
10.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
79
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
Arc in non-Vector Files
Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and calculate its arc center,
radius, diameter, and arc length.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement
options.
2.
Click the Arc tab.
3.
In the Arc Info section, select a unit of measurement from the Length
Units list in which to measure the length of the arc.
4.
In the Measured Angle section, select a unit of measurement from the
Sweep Units list in which to measure the angle of the arc.
5.
Click points on the drawing to define the arc.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc. The measurements for center
point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle, and
sweep appear in the Arc tab.
6.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Arc in Vector Files
Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius,
center, arc length, start and end of angle, sweep, and diameter.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
80
2.
Click the Arc tab.
3.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
4.
Click the snapping modes that you want to select as the points for the
measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all snapping modes click All On. To clear all
snapping modes click All Off. See “2D Vector Snapping Modes” for more information.
5.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
6.
From the Arc Info Unit list, select the unit in which you want to measure
the distance.
7.
From the Measure Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the angle.
8.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points on the drawing to
define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc. The measurements for center
point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and
sweep appear in the Measurement dialog.
9.
If you selected Arc Entity, click the edge of the arc that you want to
measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted. The measurements for center point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and sweep appear
in the Measurement dialog.
10.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
81
WORKING WITH 2D FILES
MEASURING IN 2D FILES
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
82
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
6
Working with EDA Files
In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files, AutoVue
also provides intelligent querying for EDA files; you can create/modify layer
sets, generate BOM, perform intelligent measurements, analyze nets and
components, set enhanced display options and global transparency, and much
more. For information on the available features for EDA files, refer to the
following sections.
Navigation Panel
The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left-hand side of the AutoVue
workspace when you view a drawing. For example, when viewing an EDA
drawing, it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances, nets,
and the associated pins and net nodes (pins connected to a net) present in the
current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board (PCB) design.
NOTE:
To hide or display the Navigation Panel, click
.
The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of
the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design. Lists can be
sorted in order to group similar component instances.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
83
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
NAVIGATION PANEL
You can also use the Navigation Panel to select (highlight) single or multiple
components or entities; zoom to a component or entity, and query entity information.
Customizing Columns
In the Navigation Panel, you can sort a column, change column order, or
hide/show a column. To sort a column, click the column heading.
TASK
1.
To change the column order or to show/hide a column, click
Customize.
STEP RESULT: The Customize Columns dialog appears.
84
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
COMPONENTS TAB
2.
Select the check box beside the column or columns you want to
display. Deselect the check box beside the column or columns you
want to hide.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To show all columns, click Show All. To hide all
columns, click Hide All.
3.
To change the column order, select the column you want to move, then
click Move Up to move the column up in the list or click Move Down to
move the column down in the list.
4.
To save the changes you made to the columns, select Save column
settings.
STEP RESULT: The new column settings will be retained the next time the file is
opened.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The changes appear in the Navigation Panel.
Components Tab
NOTE:
The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing.
The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins.The top
portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the
drawing. The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected
instances.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
85
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
NETS TAB
When you select a component, it appears highlighted on the drawing. To select
more than one component, press the Shift or Control key while selecting. All
the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted.
Nets Tab
NOTE:
The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings.
The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes (pins connected to a net). The
top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing’s currently displayed page.
The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets.
All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing. To select more than one net,
press the Shift or Control key while selecting. Alternately, in the Nets panel,
86
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
NETS TAB
you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets. The
Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
87
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
BOOKMARKS TAB
Bookmarks Tab
The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views (Draft views, 2D plans, 3D Views
of an EDA design) or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as
PDF.
Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link.
Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model
Space, the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts.
If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark, click it to expand and view the
lower bookmark levels. If a minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark, click
it to collapse the lower bookmark levels.
To go to a destination specified by a bookmark, click the bookmark text or the
page icon located to the left of the bookmark text.
Selecting Entities
Selecting an entity or entities is often the first step to many of the operations that
you perform with EDA files. The following sections provide information on
how to select entities from the workspace, Navigation Panel, and the Entity
Search dialog. To specify which types of entities you can or cannot select, use the
Entity Filter dialog.
See “Filtering Entity Types”for more information on the Entity Filter dialog.
Once an entity is selected, you can zoom to it in the workspace and perform
other operations with the EDA file.
88
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
SELECTING ENTITIES
From the Navigation Panel
To select an entity from the Navigation Panel, perform the following steps:
To select one entity, click the component, net, associated pin, or net node in the
Navigation Pane.
To select multiple entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
The selected entity or entities are highlighted in the workspace. If the selected
entity is small, a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted
entity in the workspace.
See “Zooming to a Selected Entity”
From the Workspace
To select an entity from the workspace, perform the following steps:
Click an entity in the workspace to select it. To select more than one entity, press
the Shift or Control key while selecting.
The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the
Navigation Panel. If the selected entity is small, a flash box appears indicating
the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace.
You can also apply selection filters when selecting entities in the workspace.
See “Filtering Entity Types”
When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace, a tooltip with information about the entity’s attributes appears. The tooltip displays whether or not
you select the entity.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
89
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
ZOOMING TO A SELECTED ENTITY
From the Entity Search Dialog
To select and entity from the Entity Search dialog, perform the following steps:
TASK
1.
Perform an attribute-based or entity type-based search using the Entity
Search dialog.
2.
Select an entity or entities from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list
of the Entity Search dialog. To select more than one entity, press the
Shift or Control key while selecting.
RESULT:
The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the
Navigation Panel.
If the selected entity is too small, a flash box appears indicating the location of
the highlighted entity in the workspace.
See “Searching Using Entity Search”
Zooming to a Selected Entity
To zoom to a selected entity, perform the following steps:
TASK
1.
If you selected an entity from the workspace or Navigation panel,
right-click and select Zoom Selected.
2.
If you selected an entity from the Entity Search dialog, right-click and
select Zoom Selected.
RESULT:
AutoVue zooms to the selected entity in the workspace.
90
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
FILTERING ENTITY TYPES
Filtering Entity Types
With the Entity Filter option, you can choose to display certain entity types
while hiding others. You can also limit the types of entities you can select in the
workspace.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Entity Filter.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Filter dialog appears.
2.
3.
Under the Visibility column, perform one of the following:
•
Select the check box beside the entity types you want to display in the
workspace.
•
Deselect the check box to hide the entity types.
Under the Selection column, perform one of the following:
•
Select the check box beside the entity types that you want to be able to
select in the workspace.
•
Deselect the check box beside the entity types that you do not want to
select.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all entity types, select the column header
check box. Deselect the column header check box to deselect all entity types.
4.
Click Apply to apply the changes.
5.
Close OK to close the Entity Filter dialog.
RESULT:
Only the selected entity types remain displayed in the workspace.
When you click in the workspace, only the entity types checked in the Entity
Filter dialog will be highlighted.
Entity Properties
The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected
entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design. To view the Entity Properties dialog, first select an entity from the workspace and then from the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
91
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
You can also double-click an entity in the workspace, or right-click an
entity in the workspace, Navigation Panel, or Entity Search dialog, and then select
Show Entity Properties.
NOTE:
On the left side of the Entity Properties dialog, a tree displays all the entities
associated with the entity you selected. The entity you selected is the root of the
tree, and all the associated entities (grouped by their type) are shown as its children.
The attributes of the entity display to the right of the tree, under Entity Info. In
the tree, select any associated entity to display its attributes under Entity Info.
You can also view entity attributes in the workspace. When you hover the
mouse over an entity in the workspace, a tooltip with commonly used entity
information appears. You can turn these tooltips off or on from the Configuration dialog.
See “Configuring AutoVue” for more information on the Configuration dialog.
92
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
Viewing the Properties of an Entity
The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected
entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design.
TASK
1.
Select the entity in the workspace or from the Navigation Panel or
Entity Search dialog.
2.
Right-click and select Show Entity Properties.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also double-click the entity in the workspace
to view its entity information.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog displays the selected entity and its
associated entity.
3.
Select any associated entity in the tree to display its attributes.
4.
To view all associated entities for any given entity in the tree, select the
entity and click Expand.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To view the entity properties for the previous entity,
click the back arrow
. To return to the entity properties displayed before
you clicked the back arrow, click the forward arrow
.
5.
Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog.
Showing Net Connectivity
You can view the net connectivity of an entity such as a pin, via, or trace with
the Show Net Connectivity option.
Show Net Connectivity is disabled when more than one entity is selected.
TASK
1.
Select an entity such as a pin, via, or trace from the workspace or the
Navigation Panel.
STEP RESULT: The corresponding entity is highlighted in the workspace and in
the Navigation Panel.
2.
From the View menu, select Show Net Connectivity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the workspace or Navigation Panel, you can also
right-click the selected entity, and then select Show Net Connectivity.
RESULT:
The graphical entities belonging to the connected nets are highlighted.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
93
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
Displaying the Entity Properties of a Net
You can view the properties of a net via the Show Entity Properties option.
The Show Entity Properties is disabled when more than one net entity is selected.
TASK
1.
Select an entity such as a pin, via, or trace from the workspace or the
Navigation Panel.
STEP RESULT: The corresponding net is highlighted in the workspace and in the
Navigation Panel.
2.
From the workspace or Navigation Panel, right-click the selected net,
and then select Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of
the selected net.
3.
Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog.
Show Net Instances
You can display the instances of a net in a multi-page file.
TASK
1.
From the Navigation Panel, click the Nets tab and select the net you
want to view.
STEP RESULT: The net is highlighted in the Navigation Panel and in the workspace.
94
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
NAVIGATING DESIGN HIERARCHY
2.
From the View menu, select Go to Net Instances, or right-click the
highlighted net from the Navigation Panel or workspace and select Go
to Net Instances.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue highlights the instance or instances of the selected net.
If the selected net appears on multiple pages the Go to Net Instances dialog
appears.
3.
Select the page on which you want to view the net instance, then click
OK.
RESULT:
The selected page is displayed and the instance of the selected net is highlighted.
Navigating Design Hierarchy
AutoVue supports navigation through the hierarchical structure of a schematic
drawing. A hierarchical block in a schematic is a symbol that refers to a child
schematic.
Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy
With the Ascend Hierarchy option, you can navigate from the child schematic
to the parent page.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
95
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
On the child page of your schematic’s design hierarchy, select an entity in the
workspace or in the Navigation panel and then from the View menu select
Ascend Hierarchy. AutoVue returns to the parent page.
You can also right-click an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation
panel and select Ascend Hierarchy .
NOTE:
If you select an entity that has multiple parents, the Ascend Hierarchy dialog
appears displaying the parent pages. Select the Parent page you want to go to,
then click OK. AutoVue returns to the selected parent page.
You can also select the entity in the Entity Search dialog, then right-click
and select Ascend Hierarchy.
NOTE:
Navigating using Descend Hierarchy
On the parent page of your schematic’s design hierarchy, select any hierarchical
block in the workspace or in the Navigation Panel, then from the View menu
select Descend Hierarchy. AutoVue opens the page with the selected child
schematic.
You can also right-click the hierarchical block in the workspace and then select
Descend Hierarchy
Layers
When working with EDA files, AutoVue lets you view all the physical layers and
associated logical layers of the EDA drawing; you can view all layer sets for that
file, or create your own. Additionally, from the Layers option, you can manipulate certain layer attributes, such as visibility, color, polarity, and ordering. To
96
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
display the Layers dialog, from the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control,
and then select Layers. From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers .
For drawings that do not contain layers, the Layers menu option and
button are disabled.
NOTE:
The Layers dialog has a Physical Layers section and a Logical Layers section.
You can display and hide these sections by clicking Expand and Collapse ,
respectively.
Physical and Logical Layers Sections
The Logical Layers section displays the layers in the order they display in the
workspace. The Physical Layers section displays the layers in the order they
appear in the layer stackup when manufactured.
The Physical Layers section displays a matrix with a mapping of physical layer
names to entity types. Each row in the matrix corresponds to a physical layer in
the board. Each column in the matrix lets you control the visibility of an entity
type, such as pin, via, or trace. The entity types that display depend on the entities available in the open file. Select a physical layer to change its visibility, layer
order, and color. Select or deselect the entity type of a physical layer to affect its
visibility separately from the other entities of the layer.
When you select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section, the associated
logical layers are also selected in the Logical Layers section. You can also select
individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section, or press the Shift or
Control key to select multiple logical layers.
NOTE:
One physical layer can be selected at a time.
The Logical Layers section displays a list of logical layers and the layer attribute
options you can modify: visibility, order, color, and polarity.
To modify the attributes for both physical and logical layers, first select the
layers you want to modify, and then use the settings to make the changes you
want.
When you select physical layers and modify settings from the Layers dialog, a
message displays at the bottom of the dialog to indicate your last action.
When you are satisfied with the changes, click Apply to make the changes in the
workspace. You can also create layer sets to save your modified layer settings to
reuse them later.
When you open a file, it displays all layer sets for that file. You can choose the
layer set you need, or create your own.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
97
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
Changing the Order of Layers
You can change the order in which layers display in the workspace. Specifically,
you can change the z-order of layers.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers .
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
If the Logical Layers section is not open, click Expand
3.
Select the layer or layers that you want to move. To do so, you can do
one of the following:
4.
.
•
Select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section. Logical layers
associated with the selected physical layer are also selected. When you
make changes to a selected physical layer, the logical layers associated
with it are also affected.
•
Select one or multiple logical layers from the Logical Layers section. To
select multiple logical layers, press the Shift or Control key while
selecting.
Click one of the following buttons:
•
Click Bring to Front
to move all selected layers to the front in the
workspace. In the Logical Layers section, these layers move to the top of
the list.
•
Click Up
•
Click Down
to move selected layers up one layer.
to move selected layers down one layer.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also drag and drop selected logical layers in
the Logical Layers section.
5.
Click Apply to see the changes in the workspace.
STEP RESULT: The file now displays according to the layer scheme you arranged.
Also, logical layers are renumbered in the Order column of Logical Layers
section.
98
6.
You can now save your changes as a user-defined layer set.
7.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers
Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific physical layers in the workspace.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
In the Physical Layers section, you can show or hide the following:
Option
Description
All physical layers
Click the All column header.
One physical layer
Select the check box to the left of the layer name. You can also
select a layer and click Visibility
.
One entity type for all
physical layers
Click the column header. For example, click the Trace column
header to show or hide all trace entities of all physical layers.
One entity type for one
physical layer
Click a specific check box.
3.
Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace.
4.
You can now save your changes as a user-defined layer set.
5.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Check boxes for physical layers can have four states:
checked, unchecked, gray checked, and gray unchecked. Check boxes that are
checked and gray indicate that the entities of a physical layer are neither all
visible nor all hidden. Gray unchecked check boxes that you cannot select
indicate that there is no entity of that type for that layer.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
99
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers
Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific logical layers in the workspace.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
If the Logical Layers section is not open, click Expand
3.
In the Logical Layers section, you can show or hide the following:
Option
One logical layer
Multiple logical
layers
100
.
Description
Select the check box in the Visibility column
.
To select more than one layer, press the Shift or Control key while
selecting, and then click Visibility
.
4.
Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace.
5.
You can now save your changes as a user-defined layer set.
6.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYERS
Modifying Polarity
From the Logical Layers section of the Layers dialog, you can invert the polarity
of the selected layer (if polarity exists in the selected file).
TASK
1.
Select the layer and then click the Polarity icon to toggle the polarity,
or select/deselect the checkbox in the Polarity column.
•
When positive polarity is selected, the layer appears as is.
•
When negative polarity is selected, the layer image is inverted; the entities in the layer are displayed as transparent and the remainder of the
layer appears as a solid color.
Changing Layer Color
You can modify the color of any physical or logical layer from the Layers dialog.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
If necessary, click Expand
to open the Logical Layers section.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Select the layer or layers for which you want to change
the color. You can select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section;
logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected. You
can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section, or
press the Shift or Control key while selecting to select multiple layers.
3.
After you select a layer, you can do one of the following to modify its
color:
•
Click Modify Color
and then select a color from the palette. Use
this button if you want to change the color of all logical layers associated
with a selected physical layer, or to change the color of many selected
logical layers at the same time.
•
Double-click a square in the Color column
of the Logical Layers
section and then select a color from the palette. Use this option to
change the color of individual logical layers.
STEP RESULT: The color of all selected layers changes in the Color column.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
101
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYER SETS
4.
Click Apply to save the changes.
STEP RESULT: The display updates in the workspace based on the changes you
made to the layer color.
5.
You can now save your changes as a user-defined layer set.
6.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
Sorting Logical Layers
You can sort the list of logical layers in the Logical Layers section by name, visibility, color, or physical layer.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
If the Logical Layers section is not open, click Expand
3.
Click the column header of an attribute.
.
RESULT:
Layers are sorted according to the attribute header you click.
For example, if you click the Color
column header, the logical layers in the
section are grouped according to their color.
NOTE:
To restore the original sort order, click the Order column header.
Layer Sets
A layer set is comprised of all the physical and logical layers in the drawing.
Layer sets differ in the attributes of the different layers; for example, z-order,
visibility, and color. You can also define your own layer sets to control which
layers you can view and print.
102
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYER SETS
Viewing Layer Sets
AutoVue lists top, bottom, and default layer sets, as well as any layer set that is
stored in the file. You can choose to display any layer set you need. You can also
create user-defined layer sets and display them later. To view a layer set, take the
following steps:
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
From the Layer Sets list, select the layer set you want to display.
3.
Click Apply.
STEP RESULT: The selected layer set displays in the workspace.
4.
To restore the default layer set, from the Layer Sets list, select (Default).
5.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also view the layer sets from the Layers list
beside the Layers button
on the AutoVue toolbar.
Creating User-Defined Layer Sets
You can define a layer set and save it for the duration of the session. The layer
set you defined is added to the Layer Sets list in the Layers dialog and to the
Layers list on the AutoVue toolbar. By default the Top, Bottom and Default
layer sets and any other layer sets belonging to the file are listed in the Layer Sets
list.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
Click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Add Layer Set dialog appears.
3.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Enter the layer set name.
103
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
LAYER SETS
4.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The new layer set appears in the Layer Sets list.
5.
To modify the attributes of the new layer set, select one or more layers
and change the Visibility, Order, or Color.
6.
Click Apply to save the changes and to display the new layer set in the
workspace.
7.
To define more layer sets, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
RESULT:
The new layer set appears in the Layers list beside the Layers Control button
on the AutoVue toolbar.
Deleting User-Defined Layer Sets
To delete a user-defined layer set, perform the following steps:
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Layers
.
STEP RESULT: The Layers dialog opens.
2.
From the Layer Sets list, select the user-defined layer set you want to
delete.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can only delete user-defined layer sets.
3.
Click Delete.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The layer settings of the deleted layer set remain
displayed on the screen until you select another layer set.
104
4.
Click Apply to save the changes.
5.
Click Close to close the Layers dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MANIPULATING EDA VIEWS
Saving User-Defined Layers Sets with Markups
You can save user-defined layer sets using Markup files.
TASK
1.
Create custom layer sets.
2.
From the Markup menu, select New.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Markup
.
3.
Create any markup entities that you need.
4.
From the Markup menu, select Save As.
STEP RESULT: The Save Markup File As dialog appears.
5.
Enter the markup information and click OK to close the Save Markup
File As dialog.
RESULT:
The Layer sets you created are saved with the Markup file. When you reopen the
file during a different session, you can view the Layer sets when you open the
Markup file.
See “Markups”
Manipulating EDA Views
As with any 2D file, with the View options, you can instantly manipulate how
the current active file is displayed. For example, you can rotate a file’s orientation clockwise or counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
See “2D Viewing Options” for more information on View options.
AutoVue provides several ways to change the view size of a selected area of a file,
display different views, layers and blocks of the current active file. You can also
navigate from one page to another page of a multi-page file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
105
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
3D VIEW
3D View
For some ECAD formats, AutoVue supports 3D views of PCB boards.
TASK
1.
In the Navigation Panel, click the Bookmarks tab.
2.
Select3D Model from the navigation tree.
RESULT:
The 3D view of the PCB board is displayed in the workspace.
3D view can also be accessed from the View menu, selecting Page, and then
selecting Next, or from the AutoVue toolbar and then clicking Next Page
.
Cross Probing
Cross probing is the ability to select elements in the schematic and have them
mapped to the corresponding components in the layout drawings and vice
versa.
The following sections provide information on cross probing between two or
more EDA files, displaying the net connectivity when cross probing, and cross
probing between 2D and 3D views of the same file.
Initiate Cross Probing
In Agile, cross probing feature is initiated from either the business object
Attachments tab or the file folder Files tab rather than from the viewer menus.
Use cross probing to interrogate ECAD schematic and layout files in separate
viewer windows.
The Agile administrator must specify the ECAD file extension in the Files
Types list in Agile Administrator Viewer & Files node in order for you to view the
ECAD files.
NOTE:
You can select both needed files from the same Attachments tab or the same file
folder Files tab from which you launch the Cross Probe action. Or, you can
106
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
select one file on the current tab and then search for the remaining file from the
attachments of any other object.
The View > By Search > Cross probe option allows you to find other files in the
system, which you may want to use to cross probe, without having to select two
files from the same Attachments tab or Files tab; that is, you can search and
select one attached file from Part 234 and another attached file from Part 765.
Alternatively, you can view a single ECAD file and then initiate cross probing
within the viewer by adding another file from your desktop.
AutoVue supports and enables correct view of ECAD files. For Example:
When an .emp or .emn file is selected for view or markup treat the file sent to the
viewer applet is the same as MCAD files such as .asm and .prt files.
NOTE:
The following sections describe how to initiate cross probing in AutoVue.
Viewing a File for Cross Probing
To view an appropriate file for cross probing:
TASK
1.
2.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
Select a file row you want to work with and choose:
Web Client: View > View
•
•
Java Client: View File(s)
STEP RESULT: AutoVue opens and displays the selected file.
3.
In the AutoVue Analysis menu, select Cross Probe.
STEP RESULT: The File Open dialog appears.
4.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Use one of the following File Open dialog methods to select a file for
cross probing:
Option
Description
Browse
Browse your local directories to select and open files from the
AutoVue window.
Agile Browse
Use Agile bookmarks to open files from the AutoVue window.
Agile Search
Perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files from the
AutoVue window.
107
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
Browsing Local Directories to Select File
You can browse your local directories to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Browse.
2.
Use the Look in drop-down list to select the directory you want.
3.
Select the file you want and click Open.
4.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
Using Agile Bookmarks to Select File
You can click Agile Browse to use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment
file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Browse.
STEP RESULT: The DMS: File Open dialog displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree
structure.
If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM, Agile Browse
does not appear in the File Open dialog.
NOTE:
2.
Click + to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file
folder versions.
3.
Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view.
4.
Click OK in the DMS: File Open dialog.
STEP RESULT: The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File
Open dialog.
5.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
108
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
Using Agile Search to Select File
You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file:
TASK
1.
From the File Open dialog, click Agile Search.
STEP RESULT: The Search dialog appears.
2.
Define your search using the following options and then click Search.
Option
Description
Class
Select an object class, for example, Items.
Search Parameter
Enter a text string or a number.
Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the
object Name or Description attribute. A Quick search behaves
like a Contains search for text strings. The search criteria is
treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or
descriptions that contain the search parameter string. In the
case of ID numbers, Agile PLM searches for an exact match,
however, you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an
ID number as a search criteria.
Search Attachment
Content
Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the
attachment files as well.
3.
In the Search Results table, click the + next to the object number to
expand the list of attachment files for that object.
4.
Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view.
5.
Click Load File.
STEP RESULT: The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File
Open dialog.
6.
Click OK in the File Open dialog.
RESULT:
The Viewer opens the selected file, or, if appropriate, adds the selected file to the
current analysis function.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
109
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
Cross Probing in Web Client and Java Client
To run cross probing:
TASK
1.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
2.
Select both file rows you want to work with and choose:
•
9.2.2.x or 9.2.1.x Web Client: View > Cross Probe.
•
9.3.x Web Client: View.
•
The file opens in AutoVue, then choose Analysis > Cross Probe.
Java Client: View File(s) > Cross Probe.
STEP RESULT: Each file is displayed in a separate viewer window.
3.
Begin cross probing.
Cross Probing by Search
To run cross probing be search:
TASK
1.
Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab.
2.
Select a file row you want to work with and choose:
•
9.2.2.x or 9.2.1.x Web Client only: View > By Search > Cross Probe.
•
Java Client: View File(s) > By Search > Cross Probe.
STEP RESULT: The Select Files dialog appears, with three Search tabs.
110
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
3.
The dialog allows you to search for any business object (for example,
items or manufacturer parts) and select the attachments of those
objects to use to Cross Probe. Use any of the following search options:
Option
Description
Search tab
Allows you create a simple search or an advanced search. You can also
search attachment contents.
Saved Searches tab
Opens to your navigation pane where you can browse in search
folders, select a search, and run it. Again, returned results may be
moved to the Selected Items table, and click OK.
Shortcuts tab
Opens to your navigation pane where you can select objects from My
Bookmarks or Recently Visited. The system displays shortcuts to only
those objects that are appropriate to the operation you are performing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Only business objects with attached files appear in
the search results table. For example, a business object that you viewed
recently will not appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has
no attachments.
4.
When the results of your search are returned, select a row in the Results
table, and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files
table.
5.
In the Related Files table, select and move attachments to the Selected
Files table.
6.
You can continue to run multiple searches or shortcuts until you are
finished selecting the attachments you want.
7.
When you are finished, click OK. Each file is displayed in a separate
viewer window.
8.
Begin cross probing.
Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files
The Cross Probe option lets you select entities in the schematic drawing or the
PCB design to highlight in all the open files.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Open an EDA file to cross probe.
111
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
2.
From the Analysis menu, select Cross Probe.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Cross
Probe .
STEP RESULT: The Cross Probe dialog appears.
3.
Click Add File.
4.
In the Open dialog that appears, enter the file name or browse to locate
the file you want to cross probe, then click Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add multiple files to the Cross Probe dialog repeat
steps 3 and 4. When adding multiple files from the same directory, press Shift
while making your selection.
5.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: Each file you select appears in a new window. A dialog appears for
each new window which lets you change the view or page for each file. Each
dialog has the Automatic option selected by default. When the Automatic
option is selected for each dialog, you see different behavior depending on
the files you cross probe.
6.
If you cross probe a schematic and PCB, one window automatically
displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a schematic. The same
is true if either file contains a PCB and a schematic. Whereas, if files A
and B contain both a schematic and a PCB and they are cross probed,
one of the files displays the schematic page and the other displays the
2D PCB.
7.
If you cross probe two PCBs, one window automatically displays a 2D
PCB and the other window displays a 3D PCB.
8.
If you cross probe two schematics, both are set to schematic.
9.
To change the view of a file in a window, do the following:
a
Deselect the Automatic option in the dialog for the window you want
to change.
b
From the Type list, select Schematic, PCB, or PCB 3D View. These
options are available in the Type list only when the views are present in
the file.
STEP RESULT: The view of the file changes in the window.
112
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
10.
11.
To switch between multiple occurrences of a selected component, do
the following:
a
From the Navigation Panel, select a component in one file that has
multiple component occurrences in the other file.
b
From the dialog of the file with multiple component occurrences, select
one of the components from the Occurrences list or click Next
or
Previous
to switch between component occurrences.
Select any entity in the schematic drawing.
RESULT:
The same entity is highlighted in the PCB design.
Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File
The Cross Probe option lets you select entities to highlight in the 2D and 3D
views of the same file.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Cross Probe.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Cross
Probe .
STEP RESULT: The Cross Probe dialog appears.
2.
Click Add File.
3.
In the Open dialog that appears, select the same file, then click Open.
4.
In the Cross Probe dialog, click OK.
STEP RESULT: The file appears in a new AutoVue window. The views that display
in each window depend on the contents of file you are cross probing.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
5.
If the file does not contain a schematic, one window shows the
2-dimensional view of the PCB and the other shows the 3-dimensional
view of the PCB.
6.
If the file contains a schematic as well as a PCB, the schematic view
displays in one window and the 2D PCB view displays in the other
113
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
CROSS PROBING
window. In this case, take the following steps to see the 2D and 3D
views of the PCB:
7.
a
In the window’s dialog, deselect the Automatic option.
b
Select a different view from the TYPE list. For example, you can switch
between Schematic and PCB 3D View.
Select an entity in the 3D view.
RESULT:
The same entity is highlighted in the 2D view of this file.
NOTE: You can select entities in the 2D view or 3D view of the file. The selected
entities are highlighted in both open views of this file.
Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing
To display the net connectivity of the design when cross probing, perform the
following steps:
TASK
1.
Select an entity or entities in any open file.
2.
Right-click and select Show Net Connectivity.
RESULT:
The net connectivity for the entity or entities that you selected are highlighted
in all the files.
Zooming when Cross Probing
When you are cross probing files, you can zoom in on the entities you select.
Zoom in on a selected entity or entities:
•
When cross probing between a schematic drawing and a PCB design.
•
When cross probing between the 2D and 3D views of the same file.
TASK
1.
Select an entity or entities in either one of the open files or views.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you are cross probing between a schematic drawing
or a PCB design, you can select entities in either file. You can also select enti-
114
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
COMPARING A PCB WITH ARTWORK
ties in any open view when cross probing the 2D view and 3D view of the same
file.
2.
Right-click and select Zoom Selected.
RESULT:
AutoVue zooms to the same entities in all the open file or views.
See also “Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing for more information.
Comparing a PCB with Artwork
You can visually compare PCB designs with artwork. In Compare mode for
EDA files, EDA options such as Select Entity, Entity Search dialog and Entity
Filter are available.
The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical
comparison.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
Open the PCB file that you want to compare with the artwork.
2.
From the Analysis menu, select Compare.
STEP RESULT: The Open dialog appears.
3.
Enter the file name or browse to locate the artwork file you want to
compare with the PCB file.
4.
Click Open.
STEP RESULT: The PCB-Artwork Comparison dialog appears.
5.
From the box, select the PCB Physical layer that represents the artwork.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For example, TOP or BOTTOM.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays three windows, the first displaying the original
PCB drawing, the second displaying the Artwork drawing, and the third the
Comparison Result window.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
115
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL (BOM)
7.
To exit Compare mode, from the File menu, select Exit Compare.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Exit
Compare
.
RESULT:
The original file appears in the AutoVue workspace.
Generating Bill of Material (BOM)
For EDA files, you can obtain a list of the components and parts required for
manufacturing the item featured in the schematic drawing or PCB design.
The Bill of Material (BOM) report produces a count of the unique components
or parts needed for manufacturing. It lists the quantity required, component
name, reference designators, value (for resistors and capacitors), size, and
descriptions. When determining the uniqueness of a component, the count
considers only the attributes chosen for inclusion in the report output. It
includes only those attributes that provide the most accurate and unique
component quantities.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Generate Bill of Material.
STEP RESULT: If you are generating a BOM for a schematic with multiple pages,
a dialog appears prompting you to select the BOM scope: Current page or
Entire design.
116
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL (BOM)
2.
Click OK after making your selection.
STEP RESULT: The Generating BOM dialog appears listing the attributes of the
file.
3.
Select the attributes that you want to appear in the report.
4.
Click Generate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To sort a column by alphanumerical or alphabetical
order, click on the column heading.
STEP RESULT: The Bill of Material dialog appears listing the count for each
component or part possessing the attributes you selected. There are also
columns displaying the values of the attributes you selected.
5.
To save the BOM, click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Save dialog appears.
6.
Specify the directory where you want to store the file, the file name and
extension, then click Save.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can specify either .pdx (Product Data Exchange)
or .csv (Comma Separated Values) for the extension.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue automatically saves the results in a file with the specified
extension.
7.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog.
117
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
Design Verification
Design verifications are operations that check the electrical design of a PCB
against a set of rules defining physical and electrical design constraints.
Performing these checks prevent short circuits and process errors. The types of
design rules are as follows:
Design Rule Type
Description
Clearances
The minimum spacing (air gaps) allowed
between two sets of entities in the design.
These sets can belong to the same type of
entity or to different types.
Electrical
Targets certain properties of the nets.
Manufacturing
Targets the physical properties of a
particular entity.
Design Rule Checks
For design rule checks that have values, you can set the global unit of measurement. The available design rule checks are:
Type
Clearance
118
#
1
Design Rule Check
Minimum
Clearance
(Pad > Pad)
Description
Specify the
minimum distance
between the pad
outline and the
outline of its drill
hole on all physical
layers.
The two outlines
(geometries) are part
of the pin (pad)
entity but on
different logical
layers.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
Type
#
Design Rule Check
Description
2
Minimum
Clearance
(Pad > Trace)
Specify the
minimum pad to
trace clearance and
pads on the same
physical layer.
Only the pad outline
is considered. Does
not take into
account traces
connected to a pin
(pad) on the same
net.
3
Minimum
Clearance
(Trace > Trace)
Specify the
minimum trace to
trace clearance on
the same physical
layer.
Does not take into
account directly
connected traces.
4
Minimum
Clearance
(Component >
Component)
Specify the
minimum
component to
component
clearance on the
same physical layer
(component top side
or component
bottom side).
Only the logical layer
that defines the
actual outline of the
component is
considered.
A component entity
is usually made up of
geometries on
different logical
layers (silkscreen,
keepout, and so on.),
but only the logical
layer that defines the
actual outline of the
component is considered.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
119
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
Type
Manufacturing
Electrical
120
#
Design Rule Check
Description
5
Minimum Annular
Ring
Specify the
minimum distance
between the pad
outline and the
outline of its drill
hole on all physical
layers.
The two outlines
(geometries) are part
of the pin (pad)
entity but on
different logical
layers.
6
Minimum Pad
Diameter
Specify the
minimum diameter
of a pad.
Only applicable to
rounded pads.
8
Acute Angle (in
degrees)
Specify the
minimum acute
angle between
connected traces on
the same physical
layer.
Only two traces
belonging to the
same net are
considered.
9
Minimum Drill
Hole Size
Specify the
minimum diameter
of the drill hole size
allowed.
Only applicable to
rounded pads.
10
Maximum Drill
Hole Size
Specify the
maximum diameter
of the drill hole size
allowed.
Only applicable to
rounded pads.
7
Maximum Via
Count
Specify the
maximum via count
allowed for a net.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
Type
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
#
Design Rule Check
Description
11
Minimum Route
Width
Specify the
minimum route
(trace) width
allowed in the
design.
12
Maximum Route
Width
Specify the
maximum route
(trace) width
allowed in the
design.
13
Minimum Route
Length
Specify the
minimum route
(trace) length
allowed in the
design.
14
Maximum Route
Length
Specify the
maximum route
(trace) length
allowed in the
design.
15
Empty Nets
Select this check box
if you want to check
for any nets that are
not connected to
any pin, via, trace
and power/ground
plane.
16
Un-routed Traces
Select this check box
if you want to check
for any trace
segment that is not
connected to
another trace
segment, pin, via on
either end.
17
Single Connection
Select this check box
if you want to check
for a net connected
to only one pin.
Power and ground
nets are the
exception.
121
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
Type
#
18
Design Rule Check
Short Circuit
Description
Select this check box
if you want to check
for intersections (on
the same layer) of
traces that belong to
different nets.
Trace entities will be divided
into n sets where n is
the number of nets in
the design.
NOTE:
19
Unconnected Pin
Select this check box
if you want to check
for any pin (pad)
that is not
graphically
intersected with any
traces on the same
physical layer.
Verifying a Design
The following steps describe how to verify a design.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Verify Design.
STEP RESULT: The Verify Design dialog appears.
2.
To enable a design rule, select the associated check box in the Design
Rules section of the dialog.
3.
To disable a design rule, deselect the check box.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can sort the design rules by clicking the column
headings for Enabled, Description, or Value.
4.
To add a value to the selected design rule, double-click the corresponding row of the Value column and enter a value.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The selected design rule must be enabled to be able
to add a value.
122
5.
In the Maximum Violations field, enter the maximum number of results
you want to display in the Results list.
6.
From the Distance Units list, select the unit you want to use as the unit
of measure.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
DESIGN VERIFICATION
7.
Click Verify.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Verify button changes to Stop. To stop the Design
Verification process at any point, click Stop.
When the process is complete, the total number of errors found during the
Design Verification process, up to the maximum number specified in the
Maximum Violations field appear in the Results list.
8.
To view the description of a violation result, select the violation from
the Results list.
STEP RESULT: The description appears in the Description field. The description
includes information such as the type of violation, the location where it occurs
(x- and y-coordinates), the component or entity it affects, and the actual value
measured.
When you select a violation result, AutoVue zooms to the entity or set of entities that were affected and highlights them on the drawing.
9.
Continue to select violation results to view its description.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to restart a new check.
10.
Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog.
Exporting the Design Verification Results
You can export the design verification results into a text file.
TASK
1.
Verify the design.
2.
In the Verify Design dialog, click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Export Results dialog appears.
3.
Navigate and select the directory where you want to export the results.
4.
Enter a file name.
5.
Click Save.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue saves the design verification results in a .txt (text) or a
.csv (Comma Separated Values) file listing each violation result and its description.
6.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog.
123
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH
Searching Using Entity Search
You can search for an entity in a schematic drawing or a PCB design using the
Entity Search option. To filter entities, apply attribute, or entity type filters as
search criteria. You can select entities from the results list to highlight them in
the workspace and the Navigation Panel. You can also export the search results
to a .csv file.
If the selected entity is small, a flash box appears indicating the location of the
highlighted entity in the workspace.
To open the Entity Search dialog, from the Edit menu, select Entity Search.
From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Entity Search . If your schematic has multiple pages, a Defining Scope dialog appears.
Select Current Schematic Page to browse through only one page. Select Entire
Schematic Design to browse through all schematic pages.
Click OK after making your selection. The Entity Search dialog appears.
124
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH
Performing an Entity Type-based Search
The following steps describe how to perform an entity type-based search.
TASK
1.
From the Edit menu, select Entity Search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Entity
Search
.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Search dialog appears.
2.
Click the Entity Types tab.
3.
From the Entity Types list, select an entity type.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To sort the list by attribute, click the attribute column
heading that you want to sort by.
STEP RESULT: A list of attributes for the selected entity type appear.
4.
If you want to search by attribute, select an attribute from the Attribute
list.
5.
If you want to search by value, select a value from the Value list.
6.
Click Add Filter.
STEP RESULT: The selected attribute and its corresponding value appear in the
list.
7.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have all the filters you want.
8.
Click Apply Filter(s).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To remove a filter, select the line in the list containing
the attribute and value you do not want to use as a filter, then click Remove
Filter.
STEP RESULT: A list of entities matching the search criteria appear showing the
column headers for the entity’s available attributes.
9.
To save the results, click Export Result.
STEP RESULT: The Save dialog appears.
10.
Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file,
then click Save.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue saves the results in a .csv (Comma Separated Values) file.
11.
To view the properties of an entity, select the entity from the Entity
Types list or the Attributes list, then right-click and select Show Entity
Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entities Properties dialog appears and displays the properties
for the selected entity.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
125
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH
12.
To show the net connectivity, click the Attributes tab, select the entity
from the list, then right-click and select Show Net Connectivity.
STEP RESULT: The net connectivity for the selected entity is highlighted in the
workspace.
13.
Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog.
Performing an Attribute-based Search
The following steps describe how to perform an attribute-based search.
TASK
1.
From the Edit menu, select Entity Search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Entity
Search
.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Search dialog appears.
2.
Click the Attributes tab.
3.
From the Attributes list, select an attribute.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To sort the list by Owner, Type, or Value, click the
column heading that you want to sort by.
STEP RESULT: The Owner, Type, and Value of the selected attribute appear in the
list.
4.
If you want to search by owner, select an owner from the Owner Filter
list.
5.
If you want to search by value, select a value from the Value Filter list.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also enter an Owner Filter or Value Filter in
the text box.
6.
Click Apply Filter(s).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Select an item in the result list and right-click to access
options like Zoom Selected and Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: A list of entities matching the search criteria appear displaying the
Owner, Type, and Value columns.
7.
To save the results, click Export Result.
STEP RESULT: The Save As dialog appears.
126
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
8.
Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file,
then click Save.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: AutoVue saves the results in a .csv (Comma Separated
Values) file.
9.
Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog.
Measuring in EDA Files
In EDA files, you can take measurements of distances, areas, arcs, and angles.
When measuring, you have the option to “snap” to geometrical or electrical
points on the drawing.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure to access the Measurement options.
NOTE:
From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
The following table outlines the available measuring options:
Name
Description
Angle
Measure the angle between selected points.
Arc
Measure an arc entity.
Area
Measure a selected area.
Distance
Measure the distance between two points.
Minimum Distance
Measure the minimum distance between
two nets.
NOTE:
This option is only available for PCB
files.
EDA Snapping Modes
The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical
points. For example, when you select Snap to Pin, move the cursor over the pin
you want to select until the pin is highlighted, then click. Highlight and click a
second pin to measure the distance between them.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
127
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle, center, and end-points of
an entity, as well as a pin, via, and symbol. The following table outlines the available snapping modes:
Button
128
Snap To
Description
End-point
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the entity’s end point.
Mid-point
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the halfway point of a
linear entity.
Center-point
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the center of an entity.
Pin
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a pin.
Via
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a via.
Symbol origin
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a
component.
Free snap
Allows snapping at any
point on the drawing.
Net
Allows snapping to a net.
Trace
Allows snapping to a trace.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
Measuring Distance
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
3.
Click the Distance tab.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
To select all snapping modes click All On.
•
•
To deselect all snapping modes click All Off.
See “EDA Snapping Modes”
4.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to measure the distance along a path,
select Cumulative.
5.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
6.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected Cumulative, continue clicking points
along the path that you want to measure.
7.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by a line. The measured distance, Delta-X,
Delta-Y and the “Manhattan Distance” appear in the Measurement dialog.
8.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
129
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
Measuring Minimum Distance
Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between
two nets.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Min. Distance tab.
3.
To measure the minimum distance between entities that are not on the
same physical layer, select Across Layers.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If a physical layer does not exist, this option determines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across
logical layers.
4.
Select First Set
to select the entities that you want to measure from.
5.
Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the entities for
the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you click Net
of entity.
, you cannot select any other type
See “EDA Snapping Modes”
6.
Click the first set of entities on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To clear the last set of entities you selected, click Clear
Set.
STEP RESULT: The entities are highlighted.
7.
130
Select Second Set
to select the entities that you want to measure to.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
8.
Click the second set of entities on the drawing.
STEP RESULT: The entities are highlighted in a different color.
9.
From the Measured Min. Distance Units list, select the unit in which you
want to measure the distance.
10.
Select Zoom to Result, if you want to zoom into the measurement on
the drawing.
11.
Click Compute.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: AutoVue does not measure the distance between
layers (z-dimension).
STEP RESULT: The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second
set is represented by a line. The minimum measured distance, Delta X, Delta Y,
and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure Min Distance section of
the dialog.
12.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring Area
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
Click the Area tab.
3.
Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points
on a drawing. The snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
5.
Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on
the drawing; the snapping modes are disabled.
6.
From the Measured Area Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the area.
7.
From the Perimeter Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the perimeter.
8.
In the Net Area Result section of the dialog, select Add to cumulate a
net area result of different areas.
9.
To subtract an area from the Net Area Result, select Subtract.
131
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
10.
Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result.
11.
If you selected Between Points, click points on the drawing to define
the area.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line. The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog.
12.
If you selected Shape, click the edge of the predefined shape that you
want to measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The shape is highlighted. The area and perimeter measurements
appear in the Measurement dialog.
13.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
3.
Click the Angle tab.
From the Angle Definition section, select one of the following:
From 3 Points: Measure the angle between three points.
•
•
4.
Between 2 Lines: Measure the angle between two non-parallel lines.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
•
To select all snapping modes click All On.
•
To deselect all snapping modes click All Off.
See “EDA Snapping Modes”
132
5.
Select Between 2 Lines if you want to measure the angle between two
lines.
6.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
7.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the angle.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
8.
If you selected Between 2 Lines, click two lines to define the angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them. The angle
measurement appears in the Measurement dialog.
9.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to define or select an arc in the drawing and measure its arc
length, start and end of angle, sweep, radius, center and diameter.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Arc tab.
3.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
•
To select all snapping modes click All On.
•
To deselect all snapping modes click All Off.
See “EDA Snapping Modes”
5.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
6.
From the Arc Information section, select the unit in which you want to
measure the distance of the arc.
7.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
8.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc. The measurements for center
point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and
sweep appear in the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
133
WORKING WITH EDA FILES
MEASURING IN EDA FILES
9.
If you selected Arc Entity, click the edge of the arc that you want to
measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted. The measurements for center point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and sweep appear
in the Measurement dialog.
10.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
134
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
7
Working with 3D Files
From AutoVue’s 3D mode, you have many ways in which to manipulate the
model. For example, you can select model parts to transform independently
from the rest of the model, as well as modify the selected model part’s visibility
and attributes. 3D mode also gives you the ability to perform an entity search
and compute mass properties, and it allows you to import 3D models into the
current window and export files to other formats. Additionally, the Global Axes
inform you of where the X, Y and Z axes are positioned throughout all the operations you perform in AutoVue.
The Perspective option shows objects in three dimension with distances, planes
and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth. You have lighting options
where you can adjust the overall lighting surrounding a model or just its source
light.
You can also customize operations to suit your needs. For example, you can
create and save your own views. Define cross sections and cut-throughs of 3D
models.
There are also features like Bill of Material (BOM) and Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) Filtering.
Understanding 3D Basics
NOTE:
The section only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
3D CAD assemblies are made up of many files dependent one upon another.
The 3D files are used primarily in manufacturing departments for drawing the
blueprint of the new instrument. 3D files may be added to the Files tab in one
or several file folder objects:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
135
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
UNDERSTANDING 3D BASICS
•
One File Folder
All files in one CAD assembly are added to the Files tab of one file folder.
When you view the assembly, Agile prompts you to identify the top file in
the assembly and the complete assembly is displayed in AutoVue.
•
One Design
Assembly Files are added to the Files tab and parts files can be referenced
from the Design added to the Structure tab.
•
Multiple File Folders
The assembly file is added to the Files tab in one file folder object, and
parts files can be referenced by adding other file folder objects containing
the files as relationships with no rules to the Relationships tab of the
assembly's file folder object.
3D files can be redlined both through a change order (Redline Attachments)
and on the Files tab of the file folder object.
Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in Multiple-file File Folder from the 9.3x
Web Client
TASK
•
To view a CAD assembly from Web Client, Attachments tab:
a
Go to the Attachments tab of the business object that references the
assembly.
b
Click the multiple-file attachment row that references the CAD assembly
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: A multiple-file attachment row is indicated by a
file folder icon in the Filename field, followed by the filenames of all the
files in the file folder.
c
Alternately, from the Attachments tab, do the following:
On the business object Attachments tab, click to select the multiple-file
attachment row.
Click the View button's drop-down arrow and then select View.
•
136
To view a CAD assembly from Web Client, Files tab:
a
Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the CAD files for the
assembly that you want to view.
b
Click to select the row for the top or starting file of the assembly.
c
Click the View button's drop-down arrow and then select View.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MODELS TAB AND MODEL TREE
Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple-file File Folder from Java
Client
TASK
•
To view a CAD assembly from Java Client, Attachments tab:
a
Go to the Attachment tab of the business object that references the
assembly.
b
Double-click the multiple-file attachment row that references the CAD
assembly.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: A multiple-file attachment row is indicated by a
file folder icon in the Filename field, followed by the filenames of all the
files in the file folder.
STEP RESULT: The Select Files window appears.
c
Alternately, from the Attachment tab View File(s) button:
On the business object Attachments tab, click to select the multiple-file
attachment row.
Click the View File(s) button's drop-down arrow and then select View.
•
d
In the Select Files window, click the radio button to select the option
View all files as an assembly, starting from the selected file.
e
Click to select the file row of the assembly file that indicates the top or
starting file of the assembly.
f
Click OK.
To view a CAD assembly from Java Client, Files tab:
a
Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the CAD files for the
assembly that you want to view.
b
Click to select the row for the top or starting file of the assembly.
c
Click the View File(s) button's drop-down arrow and then select View.
Models Tab and Model Tree
The Models tab displays the Model Tree. The tree displays the model’s hierarchy,
inter-relation of different parts, assemblies, and bodies. The tree also indicates
if a required external reference (XRef) is missing. With the tree, you can select
different parts and modify their attributes such as color, visibility, render mode
or transformation.
See “Displaying XRefs”for more information on XRefs.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
137
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
VIEWS TAB
NOTE:
The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings.
Views Tab
The Views tab lists the defaults, standard, native, and user-defined views. You
can switch to a standard, native, or user-defined view, as well as add or delete
user-defined views.
NOTE:
138
The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
BOOKMARKS TAB
Bookmarks Tab
The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views (Draft views, 2D plans, 3D Views
of an EDA design) or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as
PDF.
Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link.
Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model
Space, the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts.
If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark, click it to expand and view the
lower bookmark levels. If a minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark, click
it to collapse the lower bookmark levels.
To go to a destination specified by a bookmark, click the bookmark text or the
page icon located to the left of the bookmark text.
Global Axes
By default, there is a three-axis representation in the lower left corner of the
workspace. The X-axis is red, the Y-axis is green and the Z-axis is blue. When
transforming a model or defining a viewpoint, all operations are applied with
respect to these axes.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
139
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
SELECTING MODEL PARTS
Selecting Model Parts
You can select model parts from the Model Tree or from the workspace to highlight them in the Model Tree and on the model. You can also select a model part
and have all its identical parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model
Tree.
You can also configure the Selection Highlight.
Select Model Parts from the Workspace
TASK
1.
Select a part or parts on the model in the workspace.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
2.
To select the parent entities of a selected part, press the Shift key and
select the part again.
STEP RESULT: A pop-up appears listing the parent entities of the selected part.
Select an entity from the pop-up list. The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree.
3.
To select a group of parts, from the Edit menu, select Select,then click
and drag the mouse around the parts.
RESULT: The entities within the box are selected and highlighted in the Model
Tree. If the selected entity is hidden in the Model Tree, the Model Tree expands
to display the selected entity.
Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model
Select a model part in the workspace or from the Model Tree.
Right-click and select Select Identical Parts.
All identical parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree. If there
are no identical parts found, a message appears indicating “No identical parts
found”. You can also select sub-assemblies and Select Identical Parts to display
all identical sub-assemblies.
140
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
RE-CENTERING
Re-Centering
The Re-center option repositions the model back to the center of the View
window. You can use a model part as a central reference point to reposition a
model. You can select several model parts to use as one collective central reference point.
Re-Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part
TASK
1.
Select the model part or parts that you want to re-center.
2.
From the View menu, select Re-Center, and then select Selected.
RESULT: The model is repositioned using the selected model part or parts as the
central reference point. The Selected option is only available when one or more
model parts are selected.
Re-Center All
The Re-Center All option repositions the entire model back to the center of the
AutoVue workspace.
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select Re-Center, and then select All.
STEP RESULT: The model is repositioned to the center of the workspace.
Entity Reference
You can use an entity as a central reference point to reposition a model. The
entities are as follows:
Entity
Vertex
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Description
All vertices are highlighted. Select a vertex to use as the central reference
point.
A snap box appears when moving the mouse over a vertex.
141
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MODEL TREE
Entity
Description
Edge
All edges are highlighted. Select an edge to use as the central reference
point.
A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an edge.
Midedge
Highlight all edges in the model. Select a mid-edge to use as the central
reference point.
Arc Center
Highlight all arcs and ellipses in the model. Select an arc center to use as the
central reference point.
A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an arc or ellipses,
indicating the center of the arc.
Face
Select a face to use as the central reference point.
When moving the cursor along a model face, the face is highlighted.
Re-Centering a Model to an Entity
To re-center a model to an entity, perform the following:
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select Re-Center, and then select Entity.
STEP RESULT: The Re-Center dialog appears.
2.
Select the entity that you want to use as the central reference point.
STEP RESULT: All instances of the entity are highlighted.
3.
Click an instance of the entity.
STEP RESULT: The model is repositioned using the selected entity as the central
reference point.
4.
Close the Re-Center dialog.
Model Tree
The Model Tree displays the model’s hierarchy, inter-relation of different parts,
assemblies, bodies, and missing XRef notifications. With the tree, you can select
different parts and modify their attributes such as color, visibility, render mode
or transformation.
142
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MODEL TREE
Expanding/Collapsing the Model Tree
You can expand the Model Tree to display child entities of a selected node or
nodes.
You can also configure the level you want to expand the Model Tree.
TASK
1.
Click the Models tab.
2.
From the Model Tree, select the node or nodes that you want to
expand, then right-click and select Expand All Children.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one node, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
STEP RESULT: The selected entities are highlighted. The Model Tree expands
displaying the child entities of the selected nodes.
3.
To collapse a node, select the node, then right-click and select Collapse
All Children.
STEP RESULT: The Model Tree collapses the selected node.
RESULT: The Model Tree collapses the selected node. You can also expand a
node by clicking . To collapse a node click .
Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon
If the loaded drawing is missing XRefs, the Missing XRef Notification icon
appears in the Model Tree to the left of the missing XRef. To view XRefs are
missing, do the following:
See also “Displaying Details About Resources
TASK
1.
From the status bar, click the Missing Resource icon
.
STEP RESULT: The Properties dialog appears. You can also view the missing XRef
from the File menu, and then selectingProperties.
2.
Click the Resource Information tab.
STEP RESULT: Any missing XRefs appear in the External Reference File Reference
File Resources section of the dialog and are preceded by a .
3.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click OK to close the dialog.
143
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MODEL TREE
Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree
TASK
1.
Click the Models tab.
2.
Select the part or parts from the Model tree.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
RESULT: The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the
Model Tree.
Hiding Model Parts
You can hide specific parts of a model or display specific parts and hide the rest
of the model.
TASK
1.
Select the part or parts on the model or from the Model Tree.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
STEP RESULT: The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and
in the Model Tree.
2.
To hide the selected part or parts, right-click a selected part on the
model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Part.
STEP RESULT: The selected part or parts are hidden on the model.
3.
To display the selected part or parts and hide the rest of the model,
right-click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and
select Hide Rest.
STEP RESULT: The selected parts are displayed in the workspace and the rest of
the model is hidden.
144
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL
Manipulating Display of a 3D Model
AutoVue provides the flexibility to manipulate the display of a 3D model. You
can rotate, scale, or translate a model or any selection of model parts. You can
also navigate from one page to another page of a multi-page file.
You can access these options from the View menu. The options are:
Menu
Zoom
Sub-Menu
Zoom In
Description
Zoom in by a factor of 2.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Zoom Out
Zoom out by a factor of 2.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Previous
.
.
Return to the previous zoom level.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
or
right-click in workspace and then select from the
menu.
Selected
Resize the object so that the objects selected fill the
window.
Dynamic Zoom
Click and drag the cursor up to zoom in or down to
zoom out.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Zoom Box
.
Click and drag to draw a box around an object that
you want to enlarge to fill the window.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
or
right-click in workspace and then select from the
menu.
Zoom Fit
Resize object to fit window.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
or
right-click in workspace and then select from the
menu.
Pan
Click and drag to reposition the model, then release
the mouse button.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
or
right-click in the workspace and then select from
the menu.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
145
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL
Menu
Sub-Menu
Rotate
Description
Click and drag to rotate the model on all three axes,
then release the mouse button.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
or
right-click in workspace and then select from the
menu.
Spin
Click and drag the object in the direction you want
the object to spin continuously, then release mouse
button. To stop the object from spinning, click once
anywhere in the workspace.
The spin velocity is determined by the speed at
which you drag the mouse.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Re-Center
146
.
All
Reposition the entire model back to the center of
the AutoVue workspace.
See “Re-Centering”
Selected
Only available when one or more model parts are
selected. The selected part or parts are considered as
the central reference point by which the model is
repositioned.
See “Re-Centering”
Entity
Select a model part or entity as a central reference
point to reposition a model.
See “Re-Centering”
Default View
Displays view of the model when it is initially
loaded.
You can also right-click in the workspace and then
select from the menu.
See “3D Views”
Camera Views
Displays different views of 3D models: Isometric,
Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and View
Points.
You can also right-click in the workspace and then
select from the menu.
See “3D Views”
Views
Access native views of the model or access and
create your own views.
You can also right-click in the workspace and then
select from the menu.
See “3D Views”
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES
Menu
Page
Sub-Menu
Next Page
Description
Go to the next page of a multi-page file.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Previous Page
Go to the previous page of a multi-page file.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
Page Number
.
.
Go to the specified page of a multi-page file.
From the Autovue toolbar, you can also click
.
Display Attributes
AutoVue provides several different render methods to display a 3D CAD
model. You can also adjust the degree of transparency, change color, or visibility
to suit your preferences.
Render Modes
The choice of render mode varies between the level of detail and the render
speed of the model. For example, a shaded model is three-dimensional and
highly detailed but requires more time to render. The different render modes
are as follows:
Method
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Description
Wireframe
A skeletal model constructed using lines and curves that represent the
model's "true" edges. All internal lines are visible.
Shaded
A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces. These surfaces are
shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions.
Hidden Line
A wireframe constructed with all internal lines hidden.
Silhouette
A wireframe constructed with all internal lines visible but including
additional silhouette edges. These are not "true" edges but help to
visualize the model.
Wire Polygons
A skeletal model constructed of unfilled polygons.
147
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES
Method
Description
Shaded Wire
An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces. The
outline is a solid line and the model's surfaces are shaded to increase
the illusion of three dimensions.
Reflective
A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces. These surfaces are
have a reflective sheer to accentuate the model’s shadows.
Reflective Wire
An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces. The
outline is a solid line and the model's surfaces have a reflective sheer to
the model’s shadows.
Changing the Render Mode
To change the render mode of the selected model or model parts, perform the
following:
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Rendering.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Render
Mode .
STEP RESULT: Render mode options are listed.
2.
Select a render mode from the list.
STEP RESULT: The selected render mode is highlighted.
RESULT: The model or selected model parts change to the selected render mode.
Changing the Visibility
You can choose to show or hide selected parts; this can be done from either the
Model Tree or the workspace.
From the Model Tree, deselect the check box beside the model part or parts that
you want to hide.
Conversely, select the check box beside the model parts that you want to set
visible.
RESULT:
The selected model parts appear or disappear from the model.
148
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES
You can also hide model parts by selecting them on the model or from the
Model Tree, then right-clicking and selecting Hide Part. Selecting Hide Rest
displays the selected model parts and hides the rest of the model.
NOTE:
Changing Model Color
You can change the color of a specific model part or selected model parts.
TASK
1.
Select the model or model parts whose color you want to change.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If no part is selected, the change is applied to the
entire model.
2.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Color.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Color
.
STEP RESULT: The Color dialog appears.
3.
Select the desired color.
4.
Click Apply.
RESULT: The selected part or parts change to the selected color.
To set the model color to its default color, repeat steps 1 to 2 and click Reset
in the Color dialog.
NOTE:
Adjusting the Transparency
You can adjust the degree of transparency of a model. This function applies to
shaded and shaded wire models as well as reflective and reflective wire.
TASK
1.
Select the model or model parts whose transparency you want to
adjust.
2.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Transparency.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Transparency .
STEP RESULT: The Set Transparency dialog appears.
3.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To adjust the transparency, move the slider left or right.
149
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
LIGHT SETTINGS
4.
Select Apply Dynamically if you want the transparency to simultaneously change with the movement of the slider.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Alternatively, to adjust the transparency level, you can
enter in the Value field a value from 0 to 1. Where 0 renders the model opaque
(default state) and 1 renders it transparent.
5.
Click Close to apply the changes and close the Set Transparency dialog.
Light Settings
The default light setting consists of a white light at the 10 o’clock position with
respect to the model. In the Lighting dialog, it appears as a grey ball of white
light at the 10 o’clock position along the circumference of the larger sphere.
Ambient lighting is the overall lighting that surrounds an object. It provides
constant illumination to every surface of the model. This type of lighting is
particularly effective as a fill-light for surfaces not directly illuminated by a
directional light source. You can set the intensity or source position; too high a
setting tends to saturate the image and reduce its clarity.
Using the Directional lighting option, you can adjust the position of the light
source on an object.
You can make the following modifications via the Lighting dialog:
•
Set the intensity and source position of the ambient light.
•
Set the direction of light.
•
Add and remove a light source.
•
Change light color, brightness, and specularity.
Setting Ambient Lighting
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Lighting.
STEP RESULT: The Lighting dialog appears.
150
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
LIGHT SETTINGS
2.
Click and drag the Ambient Light sliding bar until you achieve the
desired lighting.
STEP RESULT: The lighting automatically changes with the movement of the
sliding bar. The Custom option is selected when you modify the ambient
light.
3.
To set the ambient lighting to its default setting, select Default.
4.
Click Close to close the Lighting dialog.
Setting Directional Lighting
Setting the directional lighting adjusts the position of the light source on the
model. You can also add a new light source.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Lighting.
STEP RESULT: The Lighting dialog appears.
2.
To change the direction of the light, click and drag the small ball until
you achieve the desired lighting.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also drag the white ball outside of the large
ball.
STEP RESULT: The direction of the light reflected on the 3D model automatically
changes with the movement of the white ball. The Custom option is selected
when you adjust the position of the light.
3.
To set the light direction to its default setting, select Default.
4.
Click Close to close the Lighting dialog.
Adding a New Light Source
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Lighting.
STEP RESULT: The Lighting dialog appears.
2.
Select the Two lights option.
STEP RESULT: A new light source appears as a black ball in the 5 o’clock position.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
151
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
LIGHT SETTINGS
3.
To add more light sources, right-click inside the square surrounding the
ball and select Create New Light Source from the pop-up menu.
STEP RESULT: The Custom option is selected and the new light source appears
as a white ball.
4.
Click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting.
5.
To restore the light source to its default setting, select Default.
6.
Click Close to close the Lighting dialog.
RESULT:
You can have a total of eight light sources at a time.
Changing the Light Properties
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Lighting.
STEP RESULT: The Lighting dialog appears.
2.
To change the properties of the light, such as color or brightness,
right-click directly on the small ball and select Light Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Light Property dialog appears.
3.
Select a color from the Color menu.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can drag the Brightness and Specularity slide
bars to modify the brightness of the source and the brightness of the model’s
reflection to light, respectively.
4.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To set the light properties to its default setting, select
Default.
STEP RESULT: The light properties modifications are applied.
5.
152
Click Close to close the Lighting dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
3D VIEWS
Removing a Light Source
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select
Lighting.
STEP RESULT: The Lighting dialog appears.
2.
Right-click directly on the small ball that you want to remove and select
Remove Light.
STEP RESULT: The small ball disappears and the light change is reflected.
3.
You can also select Default to restore the lighting properties to its
default setting.
4.
Click Closeto close the Lighting dialog.
3D Views
You can display different views of 3D Models or create your own views. The
following sections provide information on the default view of the model, the
available camera views, native views, and user-defined views.
Default View
The Default View is the view of the model when it is initially loaded; usually it
is the view in which the model was saved. In cases where there is no saved view,
AutoVue loads the isometric view of the model.
To return to the default view of a 3D model, from the View menu, select Default
View.
Setting Standard or Camera Views
Rather than entering Rotation mode, you can view various predefined rotations
with the Camera Views option from View and Markup modes.
To do so, from the View menu, select Camera Views, and then select the
pre-defined view you want to display.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
153
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
3D VIEWS
The view options are Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, and Right.
The model changes to the selected view. You can also click the Views tab, then
click the view from the Standard Views tree, or right-click in the workspace and
select Camera Views.
Setting Native Views
AutoVue displays views for a 3D file as saved in its native application. Native
views are present only if the file contains saved views.
From the Viewmenu, select Views, and then select Native Views.
The model re-orients to the selected view. The view options vary depending on
the file. Examples of the view options are Last Saved View, Presentation, Front,
Back, Left, Right, Top, Bottom, Isometric, Trimetric, and Dimetric. You can
also click the Views tab, and then click the view from the Native Views tree, or
right-click in the workspace and select Views, and then select Native Views.
Creating a User-Defined View
You may want to create and save your own views. AutoVue allows you to define
a view and add it to the User Defined Views. You can define a customized view
in View or Markup mode. Any views you apply to displayed models during
Markup mode are saved as part of the Markup file.
TASK
1.
Apply your own views or transformation to the displayed model.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The view states that you can apply and save for your
defined view are Extents, Rotation, Model Transformation, Explosion, Render
Modes, Color, Transparency, Visibility, Sectioning, and Camera Settings.
2.
From the View menu, select Views, select User Defined Views, and
then select Add View.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Views, then selectUser Defined Views, and then select Add View.
STEP RESULT: The Add User Defined View dialog appears.
3.
Enter a view name for the view that you want to define.
4.
Click OK to close the Add User Defined View dialog.
RESULT:
154
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
3D VIEWS
To see the view you defined, click the Views tab and select it from the User
Defined Views tree or select Views, select User Defined Views.
You can also alternate between User Defined Views and Standard Views
without affecting your personalized views.
NOTE:
Deleting a User-Defined View
TASK
1.
Under the User Defined Views tree, select the view that you want to
delete, then right-click and select Delete.
STEP RESULT: A confirmation prompt appears.
2.
Click Yes.
RESULT: The view disappears from the tree.
Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model
The Perspective option shows objects in three dimensions with distances,
planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth that reflects the
desired perspective to the eye.
You can use the Perspective option in any of the 3D Views since it is a
projection mode rather than a view point.
NOTE:
From the Manipulate menu, select Visual Effects, and then select Perspective.
The depth of the model changes.
Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point
To view a model from a particular point, you can specify a view point.
TASK
1.
From the View menu, select Camera Views, and then select View
Points.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Camera Views, and then select View Points.
STEP RESULT: The View Point dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
155
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
2.
3.
Enter the coordinates for X, Y and Z:
a
In the Camera Position fields, enter the coordinates to determine the
position of the camera lens.
b
In the Target Position fields, enter the coordinates to determine the
position of the 3D model viewed through the camera lens.
c
In the Up Direction fields, change the coordinates to values between 0
and 1 to determine the upward orientation.
Click OK to close the View Point dialog.
RESULT: The entity moves to the defined view point. The Global axes and the
User Coordinates System change position to reflect the view point.
Entity Properties
You can view properties such as visibility, color, transparency, mass properties,
and extents of a model or model parts.
General Attributes
The Attributes tab displays a model or model part’s attributes. The list of attributes varies depending on the model. Some of the viewable General attributes
are as follows:
Attribute
156
Description
Color
Color of the selected model part.
Density
The density of the model or selected model parts.
Name
The model part name or the displayed page name of the model.
Render Mode
The dynamic rendering used for displaying model or model part.
For example, Shaded, Shaded Wire and Wireframe.
Transparency
The value between 0 and 1 representing the model or model part’s
degree of transparency.
0 = opaque
1 = transparent
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
Attribute
Visibility
Description
The value True (visible) or False (invisible) for a model or model
part.
If you are displaying the 3D view of an EDA design, AutoVue displays the
general attributes mentioned above. In addition, AutoVue displays attributes
specific to the Printed Circuit Board (PCB), such as component name, board
side, component class and device type.
If a 3D file has Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) and a PMI entity
is selected, the PMI attributes are displayed along with the above general attributes. Some of the viewable PMIattributes are X-Axis, Y-Axis, font color, text
font name, and tolerance type.
Viewing Attributes
TASK
1.
To view the attributes of specific model parts, select the parts from the
model.
2.
To view the attributes of the entire 3D model, make sure that no parts
are selected.
3.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Entity Properties.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Show Entity Properties, or in the Model Tree, select the model part or parts,
then right-click and select Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears.
4.
Click the Attributes tab.
STEP RESULT: The attributes of the selected model parts are displayed in a hierarchical tree.
5.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog.
157
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
Viewing Mass Properties
The Mass Properties tab displays the precise measurements for mass, volume,
area, center of gravity, moments of inertia, and inertia tensor for any model or
selection.
TASK
1.
Select the part or parts for which you want to calculate the mass properties. To select multiple parts, press the Shift or Control key while
selecting.
2.
To view the mass properties of the entire 3D model, make sure no parts
are selected.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also make your selection after you open
theEntity Properties dialog.
3.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Entity Properties.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Show Entity Properties, or in the Model Tree, select the model part or parts,
then right-click and select Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears.
4.
Click the Mass Properties tab to view the properties of the selected
mass.
STEP RESULT: When a mass property cannot be calculated, “N/A” displays in red
for that property. When this is the case, you can also click Error Report for a
list of mass properties that could not be calculated.
5.
To change the density, change measurement units, or configure
computation of inertia tensor, click Options.
STEP RESULT: The Options dialog appears.
158
6.
Click OK to close the Options dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY PROPERTIES
Configuring Mass Properties
From the Mass Properties tab, you can change the density, the measurement
units or configure the reference point of inertia tensor.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Entity Properties.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Show Entity Properties, or in the Model Tree, select the model part or parts,
then right-click and select Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Mass Properties tab.
3.
Click Options.
STEP RESULT: The Options dialog appears.
4.
To change the density, enter a value in the Density field.
5.
To change the density units, select the unit for Mass and Length from
their respective lists in the Units section.
6.
To apply the density to model parts with unknown density, select Use
Only for Parts with Unknown Density.
7.
To apply the density to all model parts, select Use for All Parts.
8.
To change the display units, select the unit for Mass and Length from
their respective lists in the Display Units section.
9.
To compute the inertia tensor based on output coordinate system,
select Output Coordinate System Origin.
10.
To compute the inertia tensor based on the center of gravity, select
Center of Gravity.
11.
Click OK to close the Options dialog.
STEP RESULT: Mass properties are instantly calculated and displayed in the Mass
Properties tab. When a mass property cannot be calculated, “N/A” displays for
that property. When this is the case, you can also click Error Report for a list
of mass properties that could not be calculated.
12.
To save the changes, click Save As.
STEP RESULT: The Save Mass Properties As dialog appears.
13.
Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file
name, then click Save.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue saves the results in a .txt file.
14.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog.
159
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PMI ENTITIES
Viewing Extents
The Extents tab displays the orientation coordinates and center coordinates of
the X, Y, and Z axes, as well as the width, height, and depth measurements for
any model or selection.
TASK
1.
Select the part or parts for which you want to view Extents. To select
multiple parts, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
2.
To view the Extents of the entire 3D model, make sure no parts are
selected.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also make your selection after you open the
Entity Properties dialog.
3.
From the Analysis menu, select Show Entity Properties.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click in the workspace and select
Show Entity Properties, or in the Model Tree, select the model part or parts,
then right-click and select Show Entity Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Show Entity Properties dialog appears.
4.
Click the Extents tab.
5.
You have three extents options:
6.
a
Select Transformed if you want to view the extents after you have
transformed the model.
b
Select UnTransformed if you want to view the extents of the model
without transformation.
c
Select Oriented if you want to view the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the
reoriented model or selection.
Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog.
PMI Entities
A 3D file's Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) is composed of
annotations that are included in design files. These annotations indicate the
limits and constraints that must be observed during the production of the object
displayed in the 3D model.
At the highest level, PMI provides information about dimensions, feature
control frames, weld specifications, and surface finishes. This information is
160
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PMI ENTITIES
based upon key design features which are specified through datum targets,
measurement points, reference geometry (for example, construction lines,
surfaces, and objects), or the geometry inherent in the object.
The following terms can be used interchangeably with the term PMI:
•
Datums Cosmetics
•
Dimensioning Cosmetics
•
Geometric Tolerances (GTOLs)
•
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance (GDT or GD&T)
•
Functional Tolerance Annotation (FTA or FTA&A)
PMI Filtering
Use PMI Filtering to select which types of product and manufacturing information to display.
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Visibility Control, and then select
PMI Filtering.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click PMI
Filtering .
STEP RESULT: The PMI Filtering dialog appears and displays all PMI types.
2.
In the Tree column, select the check box beside the items that you want
to display in the Model Tree.
3.
In the View column, select the check box beside the items that you
want to display on the 3D model.
4.
Deselect the check box beside the items that you want to hide.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click All to show all items, or click None to hide all
items.
5.
Click OK to close the PMI Filtering dialog.
RESULT:
Only items selected in the Tree column are displayed in the Model Tree. Only
items selected in the View column are visible on the 3D model. Visibility
settings are saved and will be restored the next time you open the PMI filtering
dialog.
AutoVue supports default PMI visibility as saved in the file. To restore
default PMI visibility, click Default in the PMI Filtering dialog.
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
161
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PMI ENTITIES
Aligning to a PMI Entity
From the Model Tree, right-click the PMI item that you want to align to and
select Align To.AutoVue aligns to the selected PMI item.
Go to a Displayed PMI Entity
From the Model Tree, right-click the PMI item that you want to go to on the
model and select Go To.AutoVue zooms to the selected PMI item.
PMI Configuration Entities
The Views, Captures, Reference/Grouping entities refer to specific configurations of the model. These PMI configuration entities are listed in the Model Tree
and are activated by right-clicking the entity and then selecting Activate.
Views
The View configuration entity displays predefined views, and highlights associated PMI entities.
TASK
1.
Expand the Views tree to display the defined views.
2.
Right-click the selected view, and then select Activate.
RESULT:
The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected
view. The PMI entities are also highlighted in the Model Tree.
162
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PMI ENTITIES
Captures
The Captures configuration entity displays predefined views.
TASK
1.
Expand the Captures tree to display the defined captures.
2.
Right-click the selected captures, and then select Activate.
RESULT: The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the
selected capture.
Reference Frames
The Reference Frames configuration entity highlights the grouped PMI entities.
TASK
1.
Expand the Reference Frames tree to display the predefined reference
frames.
2.
Right-click the selected reference frame, and then select Activate.
RESULT: The grouped PMI entities are highlighted in the Model Tree.
PMI Hyperlinks
PMI entities can also include hyperlinks. To fire a PMI hyperlink, do the
following:
TASK
1.
From the Model Tree or workspace, double-click the PMI hyperlink
entity.
STEP RESULT: The 3D Hyperlink dialog appears if there are multiple hyperlinks
associated with the selected PMI entity.
2.
From the 3D Hyperlink dialog, select a link and then click Fire.
RESULT: The selected link opens.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
163
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL
Manipulating a 3D Model
You can rotate 3D CAD models along a specific axis. You can scale a model part
up and down, as well as translate the model.
In Manipulate Mode, you can resize, translate, and/or rotate selected parts of
the model. When you select one or more model parts, AutoVue displays a
model-size representation of the Global Axes going through the selected part or
parts of the 3D model.
Panning a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Manipulate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Manipulate
.
STEP RESULT: You are now in Manipulate mode.
2.
Select the model part or parts that you want to pan.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
STEP RESULT: A model-size representation of the Global Axes appears through
the model part or parts and are encased by a three-dimensional box.
3.
Click and hold the mouse button on the arrow at the end of the axis that
you want to pan.
4.
Drag the mouse to where you want to move the part or parts.
5.
To exit Manipulate mode, click Manipulate
late menu, select Manipulate.
, or from the Manipu-
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To restore the default state of a part of the model,
from the Manipulate menu, selectTransform, and then select Reset
Selected. To restore the default state for the whole model, select Reset All.
164
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL
Rotating a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Manipulate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Manipulate
.
STEP RESULT: You are now in Manipulate mode.
2.
Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one part, press the Shift or
Control key when selecting.
STEP RESULT: A model-size representation of the Global Axes appears through
the model part or parts and are enclosed by a three-dimensional box.
3.
Click and hold the mouse button on the sphere at the end of the axis
you want to rotate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The initial mouse movement determines which of the
two axes will mark the site of rotation. If the axis you selected does not rotate
around the right axis for the rotation that you want to make, click the sphere
again and move the mouse in a different direction.
4.
Clicking on an axis sphere allows rotation around one of the other two
axes.
5.
Move the mouse to rotate the model by the selected axis.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to rotate the selection freely, as done in
Rotate Mode, press the Control key during rotation.
6.
To exit Manipulate mode, click Manipulate
late menu, select Manipulate.
, or from the Manipu-
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To restore the default state of a part of the model,
from the Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Reset
Selected. To restore the default state for the whole model, select Reset All.
Scaling a Model Along the X, Y and Z-Axis
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Manipulate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Manipulate
.
STEP RESULT: You are now in Manipulate mode.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
165
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL
2.
Select the model part or parts that you want to scale.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
STEP RESULT: A model-size representation of the Global Axes appears through
the model part or parts and are encased by a three-dimensional box.
3.
Click and drag a corner cube of the box up or down to scale the selected
model part.
4.
To exit Manipulate mode, click Manipulate
late menu, select Manipulate.
, or from the Manipu-
RESULT:
To restore the default state of a part of the model, from the Manipulate menu,
select Transform, and then select Reset Selected. To restore the default state for
the whole model, select Reset All.
Transforming a 3D Model
Using the illustrated transformation buttons or by entering X, Y or Z values, you
can rotate, scale, or translate a model or any selection of model parts.
From the Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Define.
166
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL
The Transformation dialog appears as follows:
NOTE:
From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Transform
.
In the Transformation dialog, the buttons on the left correspond to a rotational
movement along the three axes, and the buttons on the right correspond to a
translational movement along the three axes and the scaling up and down.
Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Define.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also select Transform .
STEP RESULT: The Transformation dialog appears.
2.
Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate, translate, or
scale.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting. If no part is selected, transformation is applied to
the entire model.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
167
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL
3.
Use the rotate or translate buttons to transform the model.
4.
To set the translate, rotate and scale increments, click Options.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: When you click a rotation, translation or scale button,
the model transforms in increments of the values entered in the Options
dialog.
STEP RESULT: The Options dialog appears.
5.
Enter the Translate Increment value in inches.
6.
Enter the Rotate Increment value in degrees.
7.
Enter the Scale Increment value.
8.
Click OK to close the Options dialog.
9.
Click Reset to set the model to its original transformation.
10.
Click Close to close the Transformation dialog.
STEP RESULT: The transformation state remains displayed.
11.
To restore the default state of a part of the model, from the Manipulate
menu, select Transform, and then select Reset Selected. To restore
the default state for the whole model, select Reset All.
Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model
You can reset a model or selected parts to their original transformation.
TASK
1.
View the transformed 3D Model.
2.
To reset the entire model to its original transformation, from the
Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Reset All.
3.
To reset selected model parts to their original transformation, from the
Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Reset Selected.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also reset selected model parts. To do so,
from the Model Tree, deselect the check box beside the parts in the Transformation column .
RESULT:
The model or selected parts are reverted back to their original transformation.
168
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL
Transforming a Model by Setting Values
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Transform, and then select Define.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also select Transform .
STEP RESULT: The Transformation dialog appears.
2.
Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate, translate or scale.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
3.
To rotate the model by set values, enter the X, Y and Z value.
4.
To translate the model by set values, enter the X, Y and Z value.
5.
To view a mirror image, in the Mirror section of the dialog, select a check
box.
6.
To scale the model by a factor, enter a scale factor in the Factor field.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
To apply absolute transformation instead of incremental, select the
Absolute check box.
9.
Click Apply.
10.
To repeat a transformation, deselect Absolute, then continue clicking
Apply.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To set the model to its original transformation click
Reset.
11.
Click Close to close the Transformation dialog.
STEP RESULT: The transformation state remains displayed.
RESULT:
To restore the default state of a part of the model, from the Manipulate menu,
selectTransform, and then select Reset Selected. To restore the default state for
the whole model, select Reset All.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
169
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
SECTIONING
Sectioning
With the Sectioning feature, you can view the cross-section and cut-through of
3D models. In the Define Section dialog, you can define the section plane position, section plane orientation, and the cut-through.
Section Plane Options
In the Define Section dialog, you can use the following options to define the
orientation of the section plane:
Option
Description
XY Plane
Section plane is oriented along the XY plane.
YZ Plane
Section plane is oriented along the YZ plane.
XZ Plane
Section plane is oriented along the XZ plane.
From 3 Vertices
Select three vertices on the object to define the orientation of
the section plane.
From Face Normal
Select a face on the object to define the orientation of the
section plane perpendicular to the face.
From Edge Tangent
Select an edge on the object to define the orientation of the
section plane perpendicular to the edge’s tangent.
Define a Plane
Define X, Y and Z coordinates to orient the section plane.
Cut Options
In the Define Section dialog, you can use the following cut options to define the
cut-through of an object:
Option
170
Description
Don’t Cut
Display the object without a cut.
Cut
Object displayed is cut along the section plane.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
SECTIONING
Option
Description
Invert
Reverse the selection, display the other part of the object.
Show Both
Restore the cut part of the object.
Edges Only
Display only the edges of the object along the section plane.
Defining the Section Plane and Cut-through
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Section, and then select Define.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click
Sectioning .
STEP RESULT: The Define Section dialog appears.
2.
From the Section Plane list, select the orientation for the section plane.
3.
From the Cut Options list, select the cut option that you want.
4.
To define the plane position, click and drag the Plane Position slider to
the position you want.
5.
Select Dynamic, if you want the plane to move simultaneously with the
slider.
6.
Select Show Plane, if you want the section plane visible.
7.
Select Fill, if you want the section plane filled.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The fill color can also be set from the Configuration
dialog.
STEP RESULT: The section plane is displayed as filled and the Section Area is
calculated.
8.
From the Measured Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the section surface.
9.
Click Close to close the Define Section dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Once you have defined the section plane and closed
the Define Section dialog, among other options, you can choose whether to
enable, remove, or invert a defined section from the Section menu.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
171
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
EXPLODING
Exploding
You can use the Explode option to better understand the structure of an
assembly and to analyze the dismount capability. You can also save the
exploded view, as well as obtain a printed document of the exploded product for
further analysis.
Explode Options
From the Explode dialog, you can define how the explosion is to be performed
and to visually explode or implode a model.
The options that you can set are:
Option
Description
Maximum Depth
Define up to which level you want to explode. All entities from
the root level to the specified level are exploded. All entities on
the other levels will not be exploded.
If you are exploding:
Whole model - the number of available levels depends on how
many explodable levels exist in the model. For example, if there
are four levels, with level 2 being the first level under the main
assembly, then level 3 and level 4 are added to the list.
Selected parts - the number of available levels to be added to the
list depends on the selected virtual tree.
Animated
When selected, animation is shown while exploding or
imploding the model.
Show Arrows
When selected, arrows are displayed in an explosion assembly.
The arrow starts from an exploded entity and points to the center
point of its parent.
Scroll Explode
Dragging the slider gradually displays the progression of the
explosion to show the explosion dynamics.
Explode - pressing
brings the explosion level to the (n-1)
level if current explosion level is between n-1 (inclusive) and n
level (exclusive).
Implode - pressing
brings the explosion level to the n
level if current explosion level is between n-1 (exclusive) and n
level (inclusive).
172
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
EXPLODING
Exploding a 3D Model
TASK
1.
From the Manipulate menu, select Explode.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also select
Explode .
STEP RESULT: The Explode dialog appears.
2.
Select the parts that you want to explode.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one model part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting. To explode the entire model, ensure that no parts
are selected.
3.
From the Maximum Depth list, select the level to which you want the
model to explode.
4.
Select Animated if you want to see an animated view of the explosion.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: This option is selected by default.
5.
Select Show Arrows if you want to display the arrows.
6.
To explode the model, click
.
STEP RESULT: The whole model or the select model parts explode.
7.
To implode the model, click
.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To manually change the explosion state, click and
drag the scroll bar.
8.
Click OK to close the Explode dialog.
RESULT:
The explode state remains displayed, and the Transformation column
the Model Tree is updated indicating the exploded parts.
in
See “Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model”
Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model
From the Explode dialog, you can save the exploded view of the 3D model.
TASK
1.
Explode a 3D Model.
2.
Click Save View in the Explode dialog.
STEP RESULT: The Add User Defined View dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
173
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
COMPARING 3D FILES
3.
Enter a view name.
4.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The view is saved and appears in the Views tab under the User
Defined Views tree.
5.
Click OK to close the Explode dialog.
RESULT:
The exploded state is saved.
See “Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model”
Comparing 3D Files
When comparing 3D files in a non-integrated environment we recommend that
you use Universal Naming Convention (UNC) file names or the server protocol
so as to ensure that all required sub-assemblies and parts are retrieved from
correct paths. For information on UNC file names and the server protocol, refer
to the Installation and Configuration Guide.
AutoVue provides the ability to compare two 3D files or two sets of entities from
the same file or different files and display color-coded comparative data. Generally when comparing two files, you should first open the newer version of the
document and then compare it with the older version.
When comparing files, AutoVue displays three windows:
•
The right window displays the newer version of the document.
•
The left window displays the older version of the document.
•
The bottom window displays the comparison results.
By default, the result windows display added, deleted, and unchanged entities.
The Compare Tree displays the model’s hierarchy with a State column
displaying different icons representing the results of the file comparison. The
icons indicate if an model part has been added , modified , moved , or
deleted .
In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display
only the additions, deletions or unchanged, or any combination of the three. To
access these options, right-click in any window and select an option from the
174
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
COMPARING 3D FILES
pop-up menu. By default, the Comparison Result window displays the
unchanged, deleted, and added information.
The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical
comparison.
NOTE:
In the Comparison Result window, results are displayed in different colors to
differentiate the results of the file comparison. The comparison options and
corresponding colors are:
Option
Color
Description
View Additions
Green
Displays parts that are
present in the newer file but
not in the older file.
View Deletions
Red
Displays parts that are
missing in the newer file but
present in the older file.
View Unchanged
Blue
Indicates that there is no
change between the newer
file and older file.
Comparing 3D Files
The following steps describe how to compare files:
TASK
1.
View the newer file.
2.
From the Analysis menu, select Compare.
STEP RESULT: The Open dialog appears.
3.
Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to compare
with the newer file.
4.
Click Open.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays the Compare Tree and three windows. The first
window displays the newer file, the second displays the older file, and the
third displays the comparison results.
5.
To view the properties of a modified or moved entity in the newer file
and in the older file, select the modified or moved entity from the
tree, then right-click and select Entity 1 Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of
the entity in the base file.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
175
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
COMPARING 3D FILES
6.
Select the entity again, then right-click and select Entity 2 Properties.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of
the entity in the compare file.
7.
To compare the results of the entity in the newer file to the older file,
select the entity from tree, then right-click and select Compare
Results.
STEP RESULT: The Compare Results dialog appears.
8.
To view the attribute differences, click Attributes.
9.
To view the transformation difference, click Transformation.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If there are no attribute or transformation differences,
the buttons are disabled.
10.
Click OK to close the Compare Results dialog.
11.
To exit Compare mode, from the File menu, select Exit Compare.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also select Exit
Compare
.
RESULT:
The newer file appears in the workspace.
Comparing Entity Sets
From the file comparison, you can compare a set of entities from one file against
a set of entities from the another file. You can also compare sets of entities from
the same file.
TASK
1.
176
Select the files you want to compare.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
COMPARING 3D FILES
2.
From the Analysis menu, select Compare Sets.
STEP RESULT: The Compare Sets dialog appears.
3.
Click
Set 1.
4.
Select the entities from either the tree on the left or the tree on the
right.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The tree on the left is the base file and the tree on the
right is the compare file.
STEP RESULT: The selected entities appear in the Set 1 list.
5.
Click
Set 2.
6.
Select the entities from the other tree that you did not select for Set 1.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To compare entities from the same file, select the entities for Set 1 and Set 2 from either the base file or the compare file.
STEP RESULT: The selected entities appear in the Set 2 list.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
177
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL
7.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The Compare Tree and the three windows are updated with the
set comparison results.
8.
To restore the comparison files, from the Analysis menu, select
Compare Files.
RESULT:
The files appear in the three windows.
Generating a Bill of Material
For 3D files, you can obtain a list with a count of the parts required for manufacturing the item featured in the file. To generate a Bill of Material (BOM):
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Generate Bill of Material.
STEP RESULT: The Bill of Material dialog appears.
178
2.
To sort the list numerically, click the Count column header.
3.
To sort the list alphabetically, click the Part Name column header.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL
4.
To view a part or parts on the model, select the parts from the Part
Name column.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one part, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
STEP RESULT: The parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree.
5.
To save the Bill of Material, click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Save As dialog appears.
6.
Enter a file name or browse to locate the directory where you want to
store the file, then click Save.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue saves the results in a .csv (Comma Separated Values) or
.xml file.
7.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog.
179
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY SEARCH
Entity Search
AutoVue allows you to search for entities in a 3D model using the Entity Searchdialog.
You can search the whole model or selected entities on the model, perform a 3D
text search, apply attributes, entity type or PMI filters as search criteria to filter
entities. You can also search for entities by the size of an entity and location, or
select entities from the results list and have them appear highlighted in the
workspace and in the Model Tree.
The search options are:
180
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY SEARCH
Where
3D Search
tab
Attribute
Filter dialog
Option
Description
Selection
Specify if you want to search the entire model or selected
parts or parts that are not selected.
Type
Specify the type of entity you want to search. For example,
part, body, assembly or PMI.
Show PMI
parent entity
in results
When selected, displays only the parent entity of a PMI
entity that matches search criteria.
If cleared, displays PMI entities that match search criteria
in the Results dialog.
Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All and file has
PMI entities.
PMI Filter
Filters the entities that have PMI information.
Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All.
PMI Type
Specify the specific PMI attribute you want to search.
Option is disabled if PMI Filter is set to All.
Containing
Text
Specify a text string that you want to search. AutoVue
searches for a specified string in attribute names and
attribute values.
Attribute
Filters
Specify attributes to search for in 3D model.
See “Performing an Attribute-based Search”
Name
Specify the specific attribute you want to search. Some of
the available attributes:
Color
Density
Display_Mode
Filepath
Layer_ID
Name
Translucency
Visibility
The attributes vary depending on the file being
viewed.
NOTE:
See “Performing an Attribute-based Search”
Any Value
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
When selected, AutoVue searches for any value of the
selected attribute.
The attribute value options are disabled.
If cleared, specify the values for the selected attribute you
want to search.
The attribute value options correspond to the selected
attribute.
181
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY SEARCH
Where
Advanced
3D Search
tab
Option
Description
Volume
Specify the size of an entity, the minimum and maximum
dimensions. The dimensions of an entity boundary box
must be between the specified dimensions to meet the
search criteria.
Location
Specify an axes aligned boundary box. The boundary box
of an entity must be inside it to meet the search criteria.
Performing a Search
TASK
1.
From the Edit menu, select Entity Search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Entity
Search .
STEP RESULT: The Entity Search dialog appears.
2.
Click the 3D Search tab.
3.
From the Selection list, specify what parts of the model that you want
to search.
•
To search the entire model, select All.
4.
•
To search specific parts of a model, select Selected and then select the
parts on the model.
•
To search the model parts that are not selected, select Not selected.
From the Type list, select the type of entity that you want to search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For 3D Models that have PMI information, the PMI
search features are enabled.
5.
Select the Show PMI parent entity in results check box if you only
want the parent entity of the selected PMI entity or entities to appear in
the Results list.
6.
Deselect the check box if you want all PMI entities to appear in the
Results list.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The option is enabled if PMI or All are selected from
the Type list and the file has PMI entities.
182
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY SEARCH
7.
8.
From the PMI Filter list, select the type of entities that you want to
search.
•
To search all entities, select All.
•
To search entities with PMI, select With PMI.
•
To search entities without PMI, select Without PMI.
From the PMI Type list, select the type of entity that you want to search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The PMI Type list is disabled if All is selected from the
PMI Filter list.
9.
Click Search to perform the entity search.
RESULT:
The search results appear in the Results list.
Performing a 3D Text Search
From the Containing Text field of the Entity Search dialog you can search for
a text string in the 3D model.
By default, AutoVue searches the attribute name and attribute value for the
entered text.
Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing Text field and then click
Search.
Performing an Attribute-based Search
From the Entity Search dialog, you can search for entities by their attributes,
such as color, density, shading, and so on.
TASK
1.
From the Edit menu, select Entity Search.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Entity
Search
.
STEP RESULT: The Entity Search dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
Click the 3D Search tab.
3.
Select the search criteria that you want to use for your search.
183
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
ENTITY SEARCH
4.
Click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Attribute Filter dialog appears.
5.
From the Name list, select the attribute that you want to search.
STEP RESULT: The Value list appears corresponding to the selected attribute.
6.
Select the Any Value check box if you want to search by any value; the
associated value options are disabled.
7.
Deselect the Any Value check box if you want to search by a specific
value; from the Condition set condition for the search, and from the
Values list select the values that you want to search.
8.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more than one Attribute Filter, repeat steps 4
to 8.
9.
To edit an Attribute Filter, select the filter and click Edit.
STEP RESULT: The Attribute Filter dialog appears allowing you to edit the filter.
10.
To disable an Attribute Filter, deselect the check box beside the filter or
filters that you want to disable.
11.
To enable an Attribute Filter, select the check box beside the filter or
filters.
12.
To remove an Attribute Filter, in the Entity Search dialog, select the filter
and click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The Attribute Filter disappears from the list.
184
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH
13.
In the Entity Search dialog, click Search.
STEP RESULT: A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results
list displaying the name and type of the entities.
14.
Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog.
Performing an Advanced 3D Search
From the Entity Search dialog, you can search for entities using volume or location filters. Volume specifies the size of the entity: you can specify the minimum
and maximum dimensions an entity must be between. Location specifies an axes
aligned boundary box: you can specify the dimensions for an axes aligned
boundary box that an entity must be inside.
TASK
1.
From the Entity Search dialog, click the Advanced 3D Search tab.
2.
To search for entities by Volume, select the Enabled check box.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to search for entities that match all three
dimensions, select the Completely contained check box. If the check box is
deselected, then an entity only has to match one dimension in order to appear
in the Results list.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
185
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH
3.
Enter the minimum and maximum dimensions in their respective fields.
4.
From the Units list, select the unit you want to set for the Volume
dimensions.
5.
To search for entities by location, select the Enabled check box.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to search for entities that match all three
dimensions, select the Fits completely check box. If the check box is deselected, then an entity only has to match one dimension to appear in the
Results list.
6.
From the Units list, select the unit you want to set for the Location
dimensions.
7.
Enter the dimensions for Point 1 and Point 2.
8.
Click the 3D Search tab.
9.
Click Search.
STEP RESULT: A list of entities matching the search criteria appears in the Results
list.
10.
Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog.
Saving Search Results
TASK
1.
Perform a 3D entity search.
2.
Click Search.
STEP RESULT: A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results
list displaying the type and name.
3.
To save the results, click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Save As dialog appears.
4.
Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file
name, then click Save.
RESULT:
AutoVue saves the results in a .csv (Comma Separated Values) file.
186
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Measuring in 3D Files
AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 3D files. When
measuring, AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to different entity types on
the model.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure to access the Measurement options.
NOTE:
From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
The following table outlines the available measuring options:
Name
Description
Angle
Measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two
edges, planes, faces or any combination of these entity types.
Arc
Measure the precise radius, length and angle of any arc and
calculate the center point.
Distance
Measure the precise distance between any two vertices, edges,
mid-edges, arc centers, faces or any combination of these entity
types.
Minimum Distance
Measure minimum distance between any two vertices, edges,
mid-edges, arc centers, faces or any combination of these entity
types.
Edge Length
Measure the precise length of a edge.
Face Surface
Measure the precise surface area.
Vertex Coordinates
Provide the coordinates of each vertex.
3D Snapping Modes
Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model.
For example, if you select Vertex, all vertices are highlighted and a snap box
appears when you move the cursor over a vertex.
Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities.
The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected
measurement option. For example, the behavior of arc center is not the same for
distance and minimum distance.
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
187
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Button
Vertex
Edge (Line)
Description
Behavior
Highlights vertices on
the model.
A snap box appears when you hover the mouse
pointer over a vertex.
Highlights edges on the
model.
The edge is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
When measuring Minimum Distance, the
finite edge is selected. However, when measuring
Distance, the infinite edge is selected.
NOTE:
Edge Middle
Arc
Arc Center
Highlights edges on the
model.
The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears
indicating the middle edge coordinate when you
hover the mouse pointer.
Highlights arcs on the
model.
The arc is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
Highlights arcs and
circles on the model.
The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears
indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc
when you hover the mouse pointer.
When measuring Minimum Distance, the
arc center is selected. However, when measuring
Distance, the infinite arc axis is selected.
NOTE:
Face (Plane)
Highlights faces when
you move the cursor
over a face.
The face is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
Measuring Distance
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices, edges, arc
axes, faces or any combination of these entity types.
The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured
using snapping modes.
188
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Snapping
Mode
Entities
Vertex
Line
Arc Center
Plane
Vertex
Distance
between two
points.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the
line.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the arc.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the
plane.
Distance between
two lines.
The line and axis
must be parallel.
Distance between
the line and arc
axis.
The distance
between the line
and the plane.
Line
The lines
must be parallel.
NOTE:
Arc
Center
The line
must be parallel
to the plane.
NOTE:
Distance between
the axes of the
arcs.
Distance between
the arc axis and
the plane.
Arc planes
must be parallel.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Plane
The plane
and the arc plane
must be perpendicular.
Distance between
the two planes.
The planes
must be parallel.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurementdialog appears.
2.
Click the Distance tab.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: See “3D Snapping Modes” for more information.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected snapping modes are highlighted on the
model.
4.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Units list, select a measurement unit.
189
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
5.
On the model, select an entity as the starting point for the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to take more than one measurement from
the same starting point, select Fix Position.
6.
Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for
the measurement.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the
model.
7.
On the model, select the entity you want to measure to.
RESULT:
The distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a
line. The measured distance, Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the
Measurement dialog. Additionally, the coordinates for the center point of each
entity displays in the From and To
fields.
To take another measurement click Reset.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
190
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Measuring Minimum Distance
With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance
between model parts, as well as any two points from the selection sets: vertices,
edges, mid-edges, arc axes, arc centers, faces or any combination of entity types.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Min. Distance tab.
3.
Click
4.
Set 1.
From the Snapping Mode section, select one of the following:
Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts.
•
Snapping modes are disabled.
•
5.
Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity
types. Snapping modes are enabled.
If you selected Entity, select a part or parts on the model. If you selected
Geometry, select the snapping modes that you want to use for
measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To reset a set, click Clear. To clear items from a set,
select the items and press the Delete key. To deselect a part or entity type on
the model, press the Control key and left-click the part or entity type.
STEP RESULT: The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted
on the model and in the Model Tree. All entities of the selected entity type are
highlighted on the model.
6.
Click
Set 2.
7.
Repeat step 5.
STEP RESULT: The model part appears in the list under Set 2.
8.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure the
distance.
9.
Click Compute.
STEP RESULT: The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second
set is highlighted by a line. The measured minimum distance, X, Y, and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X, Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the
Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
10.
To take another measurement click Reset.
11.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
191
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between any three vertices or
any two edges, planes, faces or any combination of these entity types.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Angle tab.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
STEP RESULT: Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model.
4.
To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane, select the
With Plane check box, and then select the plane from the list.
5.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure the
angle.
6.
Click two points on the model to define the angle.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them.
7.
Click again to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The angle is highlighted and the value of the angle measurement
appears in the dialog.
8.
To take another measurement click Reset.
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius, length and angles of any arc
on the model. You can also calculate the center point location.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
192
Click the Arc tab.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
3.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
STEP RESULT: All arc and circles are highlighted on the model. Snapping modes
are disabled.
4.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points.
STEP RESULT: Snapping modes are enabled.
5.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
6.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure the arc
distance.
7.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc. The measurements for center
point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and
sweep appear in the Measurement dialog.
8.
If you selected Arc Entity, click the edge of the arc that you want to
measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted. The measurements for center point coordinates, radius, ratio, arc length, start and end of angle and sweep appear in the
Measurement dialog.
9.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
193
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
Measuring Vertex Coordinates
The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the
model.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Vertex tab.
STEP RESULT: All vertices on the model are highlighted.
3.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure.
4.
Move the cursor over the highlighted vertex that you want to measure.
STEP RESULT: The X, Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip.
5.
Select the vertex.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The X, Y an Z coordinates appear in the Measurement dialog.
6.
Click Close the close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring the Length of an Edge
Use theEdge Length option to measure the length of any edge on the model.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Edge Length tab.
STEP RESULT: All edges on the model are highlighted.
3.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure the
edge length.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to cumulate the measurement of more
than one edge, select Cumulative.
194
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
MEASURING IN 3D FILES
4.
Click the edge that you want to measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The edge length measurement appears in the Measurement
dialog.
5.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring Face Surface
Use theSurface option to measure the surface area of an entity face or an entire
entity on the model.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Surface tab.
3.
Select Face Surface if you want to measure the surface area of a face on
an entity.
4.
Select Entity Surfaces if you want to measure the surface area of an
entire entity.
5.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure the
surface.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to cumulate the measurement of more
than one surface, click Cumulative.
6.
If you selected Face Surface, move the cursor on the model to highlight a face surface, then click the face surface that you want to
measure.
STEP RESULT: The face surface is highlighted. The measured surface appears in
the Measurement dialog.
7.
If you selected Entity Surface, click the entity that you want to
measure.
STEP RESULT: The entity, as well as all the faces belonging to the body are highlighted. The measured surface of the body appears in the Measurement
dialog.
8.
To measure the face surface of the entity, click on the highlighted body.
STEP RESULT: A list appears displaying the entity and its parents.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
195
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
WALKTHROUGH
9.
Select the entity or a parent from the list.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To measure the face surface of a parent, select the
parent from the list.
STEP RESULT: The selected entity is highlighted and the measured surface
appears in the Measurement dialog.
10.
To take another measurement click Reset.
11.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Walkthrough
The Walkthrough feature in AutoVue provides an interactive visualization of
3D models.
In Walkthrough mode you can manipulate the view of a 3D model as if you are
walking or flying through the model, take measurements of the model, and
change the camera position and orientation. For example, when viewing a 3D
model of house, you can enter the front door and move between rooms and
196
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
WALKTHROUGH
floors. All the while, you have a 360 degree view of your surroundings and the
ability to add markups.
The Walkthrough feature can also be utilized when using the Collaborate
feature in AutoVue. Observers can view the Controller’s walkthrough of the 3D
model in real-time. See “Real-Time Collaboration” for more information on the
Collaborate feature.
Walkthrough Dialog
To enter Walkthrough mode, from the View menu, select Walkthrough. The
Walkthrough dialog appears.
Closing the Walkthrough dialog does not exit Walkthrough mode. To exit,
you must deselect Walkthrough from the View menu.
NOTE:
The Instructions panel explains the possible model manipulation options while
you perform the walkthrough. See “Walking Through a 3D Model” for more
information.
From the Speed panel of the Walkthrough dialog, you can adjust the increment
speed of the camera for all walkthrough functions.
By default, the Move through walls option is selected. This feature allows you
to walk through walls when viewing a model. You can deselect the option to
enable the collision detection feature.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
197
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
WALKTHROUGH
The Restore last view option saves the last view of the model before exiting
walkthrough mode. As a result, when you re-enter walkthrough mode, the last
view displays.
Select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup option to display the Walkthrough dialog when you enter Walkthrough mode. Deselect the option to
disable the Walkthrough dialog on startup.
If you want to re-enable the Walkthrough dialog on startup, from the
Options menu select Configure. From the Configuration dialog, select Miscellaneous and then select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup checkbox. Refer
to Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files for more information.
NOTE:
Walking Through a 3D Model
If you want to position yourself on a surface of the 3D model, press the Alt key
and double-click a point on the surface. For example, to walk through a 3D
model of a house, you can Alt + double-click the landing in front of the door.
Once you are at your desired view point of the 3D model, you can use the arrow
keys or mouse to navigate through the model.
The following table lists the available keyboard/mouse actions and their function:
198
Keyboard Action
Mouse Action
Function
Up arrow, Down arrow
Click and drag up, down, or roll
the mouse wheel forward and
backward
Move forward, backward
Left arrow, Right arrow
Click and drag left, right
Turn left, right
Alt + Up arrow, Alt +
Down arrow
Alt + drag up, down
or
Mouse middle button click and
drag up, down
Move up, down (Elevation)
Alt + Left arrow, Alt +
Right arrow
Alt + drag left, right
or
Mouse middle button click and
drag left, right
Side step left, right
Ctrl + Up arrow, Ctrl +
Down arrow
Ctrl + click and drag up, down
Look up, down
Ctrl + Left arrow, Ctrl
+ Right arrow
Ctrl + click and drag left, right
Rotate
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
WALKTHROUGH
Keyboard Action
Mouse Action
Alt + double click
Function
Places camera perpendicular
to selected plane
Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode
When walking through a 3D model you can add a Note markup entity.
NOTE: The Note markup entity is the only markup supported in Walkthrough
mode.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select New.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
New Markup .
STEP RESULT: AutoVue enters Markup mode.
2.
Create a Note markup entity. See “Adding a Note” for more information
on how to create Note markup entities.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can continue walking through the model while
creating new Note markup entities.
3.
Save your new markups. See “Saving a New Markup File” for more information.
STEP RESULT: The markups are saved.
4.
To exit Markup mode, from the Markup menu, select Close All.
5.
To view the 3D model’s associated Markup files, select Open from the
Markup menu. See “Opening Markup Files” for more information.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Note markup entities appear in the Markup Entity
tree, but not in the workspace. To view the markups, double-click the Note
entities in the Markup Entity tree.
STEP RESULT: The markups open and the Note markup icon
workspace.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
appears in the
199
WORKING WITH 3D FILES
WALKTHROUGH
200
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
8
Configuring AutoVue
Use the configuration options to configure the AutoVue workspace for different
groups of file formats or for all files in general. For example, you can set
different background colors for EDA, 2D, 3D, or Office files. You can also set
paths to locate external resources such as fonts, symbols, XRefs, or configure
measurement options.
To access the configuration options, from the Options menu, select
Configure.The Configuration dialog appears. To implement your changes and
to close the Configuration dialog, click OK.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
201
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
GENERAL OPTIONS
General Options
To access the General configuration options:
TASK
1.
From the Options menu, select Configure.
STEP RESULT: The Configuration dialog appears.
2.
From the Configuration tree, select General.
RESULT: The CAD, Raster, and System Options appear.
Configuring Options for CAD Files
Configure how you want to display text, dimensions, line styles, and so on for
CAD files.
Option
Text
202
Description
Select to display text entities.
Clear to hide text entities.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
GENERAL OPTIONS
Option
Description
Dimensions
Select to display all dimensional entities.
Clear to hide all dimension entities.
Line Weights
Select to display varying line thicknesses.
Clear to make all lines appear equal, with a width of 1 pixel. No
line weights display for any line.
Force to Black
Select to force all colors of a drawing to black.
Clear to display the file in color.
Line Style
Select to display dotted and dashed lines.
Clear to display all lines as solid.
Filling
Select to display filled entities as filled rather than just an outline.
Clear to hide filling for filled entities.
Load External
References
Select to display external references (XRefs) automatically.
Clear to keep external references from displaying automatically.
Raster Files
Choose how you want the raster file to display:
Select Full Resolution to display raster files at full resolution.
Select Fit to Window to display raster files to fit the current window.
Rendering
When Enable Look Ahead is selected and you zoom into a part of a file,
AutoVue renders adjacent tiles. The advantage to this is improvement in performance when zooming in on parts of a file. The disadvantage is that if the client
machine is idle for at least one second, Enable Look Ahead is triggered which
could slow down current operations. However, once all tiles are rendered, all
zoom operations speed up again.
If Enable Look Ahead is deselected, AutoVue renders the tiles when requested,
that is, only when you zoom in on parts of the file.
Resources
If Resolve Local Resources is selected, and AutoVue tries to locate XREFs on
the client-side using client path settings. If not found on the client-side,
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
203
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
GENERAL OPTIONS
AutoVue will attempt to retrieve the XREFs on the server. If Resolve Local
Resources is unchecked, AutoVue attempts to resolve the XRefs on the
server-side only.
Configuring Paths
Configure the paths for XRefs and fonts. These path settings are read only if
Resolve Local Resources is checked.
When working with files that need external resources, such as fonts or XRefs,
you may need to specify the path to these external resources if they do not exist
in the same location as the base file.
Path
Description
XRefs
The directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D, 3D
or EDA files.
Font
The directory paths for fonts required by AutoVue’s vector files.
Configuring XRef Paths
XRef Paths are the directory paths for any external reference files associated
with 2D, 3D, or EDA files.
TASK
1.
From the Category tree, expand General, and then select XRef Paths.
2.
Click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Add Path dialog appears.
3.
Enter the directory path, or scroll to locate the directory where the
external reference files are located.
4.
To browse all subdirectories below the current path, type two asterisks** at the end of the file path. For example, C:\samples\** results in
browsing all subdirectories below “samples”.
5.
To browse one subdirectory below the current path, type one asterisk
*at the end of the file path. For example, C:\samples\* results in
browsing one subdirectory below “samples”.
6.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more than one path to the list, repeat steps 3
to 5.
STEP RESULT: The directory path appears.
204
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
GENERAL OPTIONS
7.
To change the order, select the path you want to move, then click Up or
Down to move the path to where you want it in the list.
8.
To remove a path, select the path and click Remove.
9.
Click OK to close the Configuration dialog.
Configuring Font Paths
Font Paths are the directory paths for fonts required by 2D, 3D, EDA, or PDF
files.
TASK
1.
From the Category tree, expand General, and then select Font Paths.
2.
Click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Add Path dialog appears.
3.
Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the
external font files are located.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To browse all subdirectories below the current path,
type two asterisks ** at the end of the file path.For example, C:\samples\**
will result in browsing all subdirectories below “samples”. To browse one
subdirectory below the current path, type one asterisk *at the end of the file
path. For example, C:\samples\* will result in browsing one subdirectory
below “samples”.
4.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more than one path to the list, repeat steps 3
to 5.
STEP RESULT: The directory path appears.
5.
To change the order, select the path you want to move, then click Up or
Down to move the path to where you want it in the list.
6.
To remove a path, select the path and click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The selected path disappears from the list.
7.
Click OK to close the Configuration dialog.
Measurement
The Measurement options let you define the default measurement units and the
number of decimal places.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
205
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES
From the Configuration tree, expand General,and then select Measurement to
display the options you need.
The available options are as follows:
Option
Description
Decimal Digits
Lets you specify the number of decimal digits displayed for
each measurement. Enter a number from 1 to 18.
Default File Units
Lets you specify the units to use for drawings when the
drawings do not contain units.
Measurement Units
Lets you specify the default unit to use for measurements.
Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files
The Base Font option lets you define the font properties for archive, text, and
spreadsheet files.
TASK
1.
From the Category tree, expand General, and then select Base Font.
2.
Select a font from the Font list.
3.
Select a font size from the Size list.
4.
Select the Bold option, Italic option, or both optionsto change the font
style.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can see a preview of the text in the Sample area.
5.
Click OK to apply the font change and close the Configuration dialog.
Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files
You can configure background color, snap and overlay extents settings for 2D
files.
TASK
1.
From the Options menu, select Configure.
STEP RESULT: The Configuration dialog appears.
206
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES
2.
Select 2D in the tree.
STEP RESULT: The 2D options appear.
Snap Settings
In measurement mode, when you move the cursor within a predetermined snap
radius, the snap box appears for the entity to be selected. To change the snap
radius, change the value in the Snap Radius field. The snap radius is configured
in pixels.
NOTE:
You must restart the AutoVue client for the configuration to take effect.
Overlays Extents Settings
When you add overlays, AutoVue automatically tries to scale the overlay extents
to match the base file extents. If you wish to disable this behavior, clear the
Match Extents checkbox in the Overlays section of the 2D Configure dialog.
Configuring Colors
The Colors settings let you modify colors for 2D files.
From the tree, expand 2D, and then select Colors to display the following
options:
Option
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Description
Background
Change the color of the background for 2D files.
Measurement
Modify the color you want displayed when taking
measurements on 2D files.
207
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files
There are configuration options that you can set to customize the work environment when working with 3D files.
TASK
1.
From the Options menu, select Configure.
STEP RESULT: The Configuration dialog appears.
2.
From the Category tree, select 3D.
STEP RESULT: The Rendering, Dynamic Rendering, and Frame Rate options
appear.
Rendering
The Rendering options let you modify the manner in which the model is
rendered.
Changing these options affects the level of detailed displayed. The Rendering
options are:
Option
Description
Smooth Shading
Set by default. Turning this option off renders curved surfaces
of shaded models as a series of flat surfaces. The level of detail is
thus reduced but render speed is increased.
Only affects shaded models.
Back-Face Removal
If selected, instructs AutoVue not to render the back faces of the
model being displayed. This increases the render speed but the
model appears less realistic while in motion.
Only affects shaded models.
Tristrip
If selected, enable/disable tristripping of mesh data for display.
Dynamic Rendering
The Dynamic Rendering options let you select the rendering mode for a model
in motion.
The options you can select are:
208
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
Menu Option
Description
Fast Frame
Model spins or rotates at a fast rate. The level of detail is
reduced, which enables faster rendering when the model is
in motion.
Wire Frame
Model is displayed as wire framed during rotation or
spinning.
Flat Shading
Smooth shading is not performed on curved surfaces while
the model is in motion.
Wire Polygons
Render the model in wire polygon mode while in motion.
Vertex Cloud
Model is displayed as a skeleton of vertices when in motion.
Bounding Box
Model parts are enclosed by bounding boxes when the
model is in motion.
Current Render Mode
Model is rendered in the same mode whether moving or
static.
Frame Rate
The Frame Rate slider lets you define the frame rate for rotating and dynamic
zooming on 3D files. Drag the slider to specify the frame rate. Drag the slider to
the left for a lower frame rate and to the right for a higher frame rate.
A higher frame rate results in a lower resolution.
Optimized Rendering
Select the Enable Optimized Rendering option to accelerate the rendering time
of drawings. Note that
You must restart your AutoVue client after selecting or deselecting this
option to apply the setting.
NOTE:
Model
The Model configuration options let you control the streaming method, the
dynamic load mesh resolution, and the visibility of model parts.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
209
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
From the Category tree, expand 3D, and then select Model to load the Loading,
Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution, Initial Visibility, and PMI Initial Visibility
options.
Loading
Control the streaming method with the Dynamic Loader option.
When the option is selected, AutoVue loads enough detail to display an accurate
visual representation of the model. The data is loaded based on the level of detail
that is necessary at that point in time.
When the option is deselected, AutoVue requests data in 10% chunks until it
reaches full resolution for the file. You would see the model initially at coarse
resolution, but continuously refining.
Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution
Control the initial resolution with the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution slider.
When you select Dynamic Loader, you can control the initial resolution by
setting the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution. When you set the Dynamic Load
Mesh Resolution to High, the file displays at a higher resolution when you
zoom, resulting in a smoother look.
For more information, refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide.
Initial Visibility
With the Initial Visibility options, you can specify the visibility of model parts
when first opening a 3D file.
Option
210
Description
Default Visibility
Load model with default visibility options.
All Visible
Force all parts ON in the display.
All Invisible
Force all parts OFF in the display.
To display model parts, select the part(s) from the Model Tree.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
PMI Initial Visibility
With the PMI Initial Visibility option, you have the option to set a threshold
for the number of PMIs to display for large models. To do, select the Don’t
display PMI for large models check box, and then enter the number of PMIs to
display in the PMI Threshold field.
PMI Filtering
From the tree, expand 3D, and then select PMI to display the PMI options.
The PMI Filtering options let you configure which types of product and manufacturing information to display. The check boxes in the Tree column let you
select which PMI entity types display in the 3D model tree. The check boxes in
the View column let you select which PMI entity types display in the workspace.
The following PMI Text Rendering Style options let you define the style for the
PMI text:
Option
Description
Native Setting
(from file)
PMI text displays with the default setting.
3D
PMI text displays in 3-dimensions. It may not always face you.
Flat-to-screen
PMI text always faces you.
Configuring Color
With the Coloroptions, you can configure the color to allow easier viewing of
3D file details.
From the Configuration tree, expand 3D, and then select Colors to view the
available Color options. They are grouped under Common, Section Highlight,
and Geometry Highlight, as follows:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
211
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
Common
Option
Description
Background
Set the background color for 3D view.
Selection
Set the color when selecting a model or model parts.
Min. Distance Set
1
Set the color of the first set-point when measuring minimum distance.
Min. Distance Set
2
Set the color of the second set-point when measuring minimum
distance.
Section Highlight
Option
Description
Edges
Set the color for the section edges when defining Section Cut Options.
Fill
Set the fill color when defining Section Cut Options.
Geometry Highlight
Option
Description
Vertex
Set the color for vertices when highlighted during measurement and
markup.
Face
Set the color for faces when highlighted during measurement and
markup.
Edge
Set the color for edges when highlighted during measurement and
markup.
Configuring Background
With the Background options, you can select a gradient or an image to display
in the background. From the Configuration tree, expand 3D, and then select
Background.The Background Gradient and Background Images options
appear.
212
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
For the Background Gradient option
Select either Plain, Directional Gradient, or Radial Gradient. The background
is previewed to the rights of the options.
For the Background Images option
This feature adds a single or multiple background images to the workspace.
TASK
1.
Click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Background Image dialog appears.
2.
Click on the ellipses to the right of the Image File field to browse to the
image file.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can only select .bmp, .jpeg, or .imgfiles.
3.
From the Stretch Type list, select whether to leave the image as is,
Stretch to fill, Zoom to fit,or Zoom to fill.
4.
From the Position in the Background list, select where to position the
image and then click OK.
5.
To add multiple background images, repeat steps 1 through 4.
6.
You can change the order of the background images. To do so, select a
file from the Background Images list and then click Up to move an
image to the front and Down to send an image to the back.
7.
To edit the background image, select the file from the Background
Images list and then click Edit.
STEP RESULT: The Background Image dialog appears. Edit as required.
8.
To remove a background image, from the Background Images list,
select the file and then click Remove.
9.
Click OK when done.
RESULT:
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
The selected background image is implemented.
213
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES
Miscellaneous
From the Configuration tree, expand 3D,and then select Miscellaneous to
display the Miscellaneous option:
Display
The Show Global Axes option is active by default. Disable this option to remove
the axes that display in the bottom-right corner of the workspace.
You can change the size of the global axes by moving the Size of Axes slider.
Move the slider to the left to minimize the axes and to right to maximize.
Model Tree
Enter a value in the Expand Level field to define the level at which you want the
Model Tree to display when opening a 3D file. The default level is 3.
Alternately, select Expand On Demand to the collapse the whole tree.
Manipulator
Enable the Align with current UCS option to automatically align the manipulators with the current User-defined Coordinate System.
Selection
The following Selection options let you define how AutoVue indicates that an
object is selected.
Option
214
Description
Highlight Bounding Box
Selection is enclosed in a wireframe box.
Highlight Entity
Selection is indicated by changing color.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES
Walkthrough
The following Walkthrough options let you configure the view to use when you
enter walkthrough mode and to control whether or not you want to see the
Walkthrough dialog at startup.
Option
Description
Restore Last View
Select this option to save the last view of the model before
exiting walkthrough mode. As a result, when you re-enter
walkthrough mode, the last view displays.
Show Walkthrough
dialog on startup
Select this option if you want the Walkthrough dialog to display
when you start walkthrough mode. Clear this option if you do
not want to see the Walkthrough dialog on startup.
Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files
There are configuration options that allow you to customize your work environment when working with EDA files. To access the EDA configuration
options, from the Options menu, select Configure. In the Configuration dialog
that appears, select EDA in the tree.
Customizing Selections
Configure how you want selected components to be highlighted. From the
Configuration tree, select EDA. There are two selection options: Highlight
Entity and Dim Unselected.
Highlight Entity
Activate this option to highlight all entities that you select. This option is
enabled by default.
NOTE:
The default highlight color is yellow.
See also “Modifying Colors
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
215
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES
Dim Unselected
Activate this option to dim all the entities that are not selected. Selected entities
retain their original entity color.
From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Dim Unselected
.
When you select Dim Unselected, you can set the dimness level for entities that
are not selected. Drag the slider to the right to increase the dimness level and to
the left to decrease the dimness level. The icon to the right of the dimness
settings in theConfiguration dialog lets you preview the dimness level.
Additionally, with Dim Unselected, you can select the Thicken Highlighted
Entity check box. This option makes the selected entity appear more
pronounced. Deselect the check box to return the entity to its default thickness.
Displaying Tooltips
When you hover the mouse over an entity, a tooltip appears to show you information about the entity. You can disable or enable these tooltips. When the
option is selected, AutoVue automatically retrieves the entity information from
the server. Clear this option if you do not want this behavior every time your
mouse hovers over an entity.
TASK
1.
From the tree, select EDA.
2.
Under the Mouse Hover heading, select or deselect the Show Entity
Information Tooltip option.
3.
Click OK.
Modifying 3D View
You can configure the board thickness and component height for the 3D PCB
view of EDA files. Note that these Board Thickness and Component Height
values are used only if the underlying EDA file does not contain board thickness
and component height information.
TASK
1.
216
From the Configuration tree, select EDA.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES
2.
Enter a value in the Default Board Thickness field to change the
board’s thickness.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Default Board Thickness option only affects
boards that have no board thickness defined in the design. If a board has a
defined thickness, this option does not affect that board.
3.
Enter a value in the Default Component Height field to change the
component height.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Default Component Height option affects
components that do not have height defined in the design. If a component
has a defined height, this option does not affect that component.
4.
To work with a different unit of measurement, select another unit from
the Default Units list. This is the unit of measurement used for values
set in the Default Board Thickness and Default Component Height
fields.
5.
Reload the file to see your changes.
Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files
When you compare files, you can synchronize all layer settings. When the layer
settings are synchronized, changing one setting changes the same setting for
both files you are comparing.
NOTE:
This option is selected by default and is only applicable for PCB drawings.
TASK
1.
From the tree, expand EDA, and then select Analysis.
2.
Select the Layer Settings option to synchronize all layer settings when
comparing files.
Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing
You can configure the zoom options when you cross probe files.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the tree, expand EDA, and then select Analysis.
217
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES
2.
Select one of the following Cross Probe Action options:
a
Select Keep Current Zoom Level. When this option is active, the view
of the target files remains the same while you cross probe.
b
Select Zoom Selected to automatically zoom in on selected entities
while you cross probe. This option is enabled by default.
c
Select Zoom Fit to automatically adjust the contents of a file along the
horizontal and vertical axis to fully display within the current window.
Modifying Colors
You can configure the colors for EDA files.
From the tree, expand EDA, and then select Colors.
In the Color Options dialog, the options that you can configure are grouped
under Common, PCB, and 3D View as follows:
Common
Option
Description
Background
Set the background color for all views (except the PCB 3D view) and
file types.
Selection
Set the color when selecting an entity.
PCB
Option
Description
Min. Distance Set 1
Set color for the first minimum distance set.
Min. Distance Set 2
Set color for the second minimum distance set.
Plated Drill Hole
Set color for plated drill holes. The default color is black.
To override the native color, select Override Native Color.
NOTE:
218
Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES
Option
Non-plated Drill Hole
Description
Set color for non-plated drill holes. The default color is black.
To override the native color, select Override Native Color.
NOTE:
Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only.
3D View
Option
Description
Default Board Color
Configure the color of the board in 3D view.
Default Component Color
Configure the component color in 3D view.
Enhanced Display Options
You can configure the following enhanced display options for EDA files.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
219
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR GRAPHIC FILES
Main Menu
Display Options
Option
Plated Hole Visibility
Description
Select whether to use the native
settings or turn on /off the plated
hole visibility.
Applicable to Cadence
Allegro format only.
NOTE:
Non-plated Hole
Visibility
Select whether to use the native
settings or turn on /off the
non-plated hole visibility.
Applicable to Cadence
Allegro format only.
NOTE:
Pad Filling
Select whether to use the native
settings or turn on/off pad
filling.
Applicable to Cadence
Allegro format only.
NOTE:
Line Caps/Joins
Select whether to use the native
settings or turn on/off line
caps/joins.
Applicable to Cadence
Allegro format only.
NOTE:
Global Transparency
Move slider to select global
transparency level.
Configuring Background Colors for Graphic
Files
Specify background colors for mono raster files and color raster files.
TASK
1.
From the Options menu, select Configure.
STEP RESULT: The Configuration dialog that appears.
220
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE
2.
Select Graphics in the tree.
3.
From their respective Background lists, select colors for monochrome
raster files and color raster files.
Configuring Background Colors for Desktop
Office
Specify background colors for the following types of Desktop Office files: Document, Spreadsheet, Database and Archive.
TASK
1.
From the Optionsmenu, selectConfigure.
STEP RESULT: The Configuration dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
Select Desktop Office in the tree.
3.
Select a background color for each Desktop Office file type.
221
CONFIGURING AUTOVUE
CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE
222
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
9
Markups
AutoVue has the ability to view many file formats and to create markups for all
its readable file formats without the document's authoring application.
Marking up refers to drawing and writing on an electronic document. When
you create a markup for a file, the markup is created on top of the original file.
Markups entities are saved in Markup files.
If a document has existing Markup files, the Markup Indicator icon appears
in the status bar at the bottom of the AutoVue workspace. Clicking the Markup
Indicator opens the Markup Filesdialog and allows you to select the Markup
files to display.
When you open a Markup file, AutoVue layers the markup over the original file.
In Markup mode you can:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
•
Create entities such as text, arcs, boxes, circles, clouds, lines, arrows, and
polygons. Note that AutoVue exits markup creation mode after you create
a markup entity. In previous releases of AutoVue, you were able to
continue adding markups until you right-click the workspace.
•
Add a stamp or information to an entity by adding a text or a note.
•
Create, name, and color layers to organize your work.
223
MARKUPS
MARKUP NAVIGATION TREE
•
Create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of
different Markup files.
•
Create measurement markup entities that can be moved or resized. Note
that measurements made in Markup mode have up to a 1% margin of
error.
•
Navigate markups through a hierarchy tree, view markup properties, and
sort the tree according to each property.
•
View markup layers individually or in combination.
•
When in Markup mode, you can press Shift+Left Mouse button to select
multiple markups entities in order to drag or copy and paste to a new location.
•
Press Esc at any point to cancel the markup creation.
Markup Navigation Tree
When you are in Markup mode, a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the
workspace. If the tree does not appear, from the Options menu, select Show
Panel, and then select Markup Panel.
The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users. You can
navigate through the markups. A set of properties is generated for each markup.
You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the
column headers. These properties are:
Property
224
Description
Markup Entity
Type of markup entity created.
Author
The name of the user who created the markup entity.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FILTERING MARKUPS
Property
Description
Last Modified
The date and time the markup entity was last modified.
Page
Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is
created.
Layer
Markup layer on which the markup entity is created.
When a markup entity is created, it appears in the tree and the information is
recorded and saved in the Markup file.
NOTE:
Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties.
Filtering Markups
When viewing markups, you have the option to filter the Markup files or entities that are displayed based on their metadata information.
To do so, from the Markup menu, select Filter and then select one of the
following options: By Author, By Entity Types, By Last Modified, By Page, and
By Layer. The Filter Markup Visibility dialog appears.
NOTE:
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Markup Filter
•
To display markups created by a specific author, click the Author tab and
select the check box next to the author’s name. To remove an author’s
markup from the filter, deselect the associated check box. In the Markup
Navigation Tree, a filter icon appears in the Author column header.
•
To display markups by entity type, click the Markup Entity tab and select
the check box next to the markup entity or entities. To remove a markup
entity from the filter, deselect the associated check box. In the Markup
Navigation Tree, a filter icon appears in the Markup Entity column
header.
•
To display markups based on when they were last modified, click the Last
Modified tab. From the list, select one of the following options:
Option
Anytime
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
.
Description
Displays all markup entities.
225
MARKUPS
AD HOC MARKUPS
Option
Description
Before
Displays all markup entities modified before
the selected date.
After
Displays all markup entities modified after
the selected date.
On
Displays all markup entities modified on the
selected date.
Between
Displays all markup entities modified
between the selected dates.
In the Markup Navigation Tree, a filter icon appears in the Last Modified
column header.
•
To display markups by page location, click the Page tab and select one of
the following:
Option
•
Description
All pages
Displays markup entities on all the pages.
Current page
Displays markup entities on the currently
selected page.
Page range
Displays the markup entities on the selected
page range.
To display markups by layers, click the Layer tab and select the check box
next to the layer or layers. To remove a layer from the filter, deselect the
associated check box. In the Markup Navigation Tree, a filter icon appears
in the Layer column header.
NOTE: To remove the filters, from the Markup menu, select Filter,and then select
Show All.
Ad Hoc Markups
NOTE:
This sectoin only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
Ad hoc markups are only available if the file folders are made available to
end users.
NOTE:
226
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
Ad hoc 2D, 3D, and EDA markups can be done from the Files tab in the file
folder object. Change order-controlled 2D, 3D, and EDA markups can be done
from the Redline Attachments tab in the ECO. When you view a markup file,
the original document, also known as the base file, opens too.
NOTE:
Change order-controlled and ad hoc markups are independent from each
other.
To view change order-controlled markups, open the redlined file from the
appropriate revision of the item Attachments tab or from the change order
Redline Attachments tab.
Guidelines for Marking Up or Redlining Attachments
NOTE:
This section only applies to AutoVue for Agile PLM.
With appropriate privileges, you can redline Microsoft Office documents, 2D,
3D, and EDA files on the Files tab of a file folder object and redline 2D, 3D, and
EDA files on the Redline Attachments tab, accessible from the Affected Items
tab of an ECO.
You can create and edit file markups only through the Affected Items tab
of an ECO or the Files tab of a file folder object. Your Agile administrator must
give you privileges that allow you to mark up or redline attachments. For more
information about ECOs and file folder objects, refer to the Getting Started with
Agile PLM Guide.
NOTE:
The following sections provide information on how to markup files from an
ECO in Web and Java clients.
Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9.3.x
If the item has already been redlined, then the Has been redlined icon is
displayed for that item row in the Affected Items table. An icon appears on the
Redline Attachments tab to indicate that the attachment in that row has been
NOTE:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
227
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
redlined. To initiate redlining, select the attachment row you want to redline and
click Redline.
TASK
•
To markup or redline an attachment file from an ECO in the Web Client:
a
If you have not already done so, add an item with an attachment to the
Affected Items tab of an unreleased ECO. The item now has a pending
revision associated with the unreleased ECO.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: When redlining an attachment through an ECO,
the pending revision attachment Folder Version must be set to a specific
version number; if the Folder Version is set to LATEST-x, you will not be
able to create redline markups. However, you can edit the Folder
Version on the Attachments tab of the pending revision so that it refers
to a specific Folder Version.
For example, if the pending revision of the item refers to Folder Version
LATEST-7 of the file folder, select that row on the Attachments tab,
double-click the Versions field to edit it and then select 7. Click Save to
complete the edit process. You can now create redline markups for that
attachment. On the Affected Items tab, in the redline Attachment tab,
select the row and click Redline.
b
On the Affected Items tab, select the row of the Item you want to
redline. The redline tabs for the selected item appear in the lower
section of the Affected Items tab.
c
On the Redline Attachments tab, select one or more rows and click
Redline (this button is only active when markups are allowed).
d
Add your markups to the attachment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: ECO markups are saved against and associated
with the pending revision of the item. If the ECO is released without first
replacing the file, the markups appear against the released revision of
the item.
•
To ad hoc markup or redline an attachment file from a File Folder object
in the Web Client:
a
On the Files tab of a file folder object, select one or more rows and click
Redline (this button appears only when markups are allowed).
b
Add your markups to the attachment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Ad hoc markups are saved against and associated with the version of the file folder object.
228
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
Java Client ECO Markups
TASK
•
To markup or redline an attachment file from an ECO in the Java Client:
a
Add an item with an attachment to the Affected Items tab of an unreleased ECO. The item now has a pending revision associated with the
unreleased ECO.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: When redlining an attachment through an ECO,
the pending revision attachment Folder Version must be set to a specific
version number. If the Folder Version is set to LATEST-x, you will not be
able to create redline markups. However, you can edit the Folder
Version on the Attachments tab of the pending revision so that it refers
to a specific Folder Version.
For example, if the pending revision of the item refers to Folder Version
LATEST-7 of the file folder, select that row on the Attachments tab, click
the Edit button and use the Folder Version drop-down list in the Edit
dialog box to select 7. Click OK to complete the edit process. You will
now be able to create redline markups for that attachment. Select the
added item on the Affected Items tab of the ECO.
b
On the Redline Attachments tab, select the row containing the file you
want to redline and click the Do Redlining icon in that row.
c
When AutoVue opens, click Markup. (This button is available only when
markups are allowed.)
d
Add your markups to the attachment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: ECO markups are saved against and associated
with the pending revision of the item. If the ECO is released without first
replacing the file, the markups appear against the released revision of
the item.
•
To ad hoc markup or redline an attachment file from a file folder object
in the Java Client:
a
Double-click the row containing the file you want to redline.
b
When AutoVue opens, click Markup. (This button is available only when
markups are allowed.)
c
Add your markups to the attachment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Ad hoc markups are saved against and associated with the version of the file folder object.
Redlining Markups for Change Orders
The change order redlines of 2D, 3D, and EDA files are based on the pending
revision of the item. The markup changes are visible from either the change
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
229
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
order's Redline Attachments tab or from the pending revision item Attachments tab.
AutoVue 3D features and access to 3D files are available only with
AutoVue applications that support 3D files. AutoVue features for schematic and
PCB files, also referred to as EDA files, are available only with AutoVue applications that support those files. For more information about purchasing or installing
AutoVue, contact Oracle Consulting - Agile Practice.
NOTE:
Viewing ECO Redlines from the Attachments Tab of the Item Pending Revision
You can view the change order markup redlines of the pending revision by
displaying the Attachments tab of the item pending revision. For example, revision (C) ECO000453.
•
In Web Client, click the Has been redlined icon (for versions 9.2.2.x and
9.2.1.x, for version 9.3.x) n the row of the file you want to view.
•
In Java Client, select the redlined file you want to view and click the Has
been redlined icon.
If you have checked out the redlined file and checked in a new version from the
Attachments tab, the Has been redlined icon does not appear on the Attachments table.
TASK
•
To view the redlines of previous versions in Web Client:
a
For 9.2.2.x/9.2.1.x, from the Attachments tab of the pending revision,
click the Show Versions icon in the row you want to view.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For 9.3.x, select View Versions from the
Actions menu.
STEP RESULT: The Versions dialog appears.
b
On the version row for which you want to view redlines, click the Has
been redlined icon (for versions 9.2.2.x and 9.2.1.x, for version 9.3.x).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you need to determine which file folder
version is associated with the change order redlines, refer to the change
order History tab.
•
230
To view the redlines of previous versions in Java Client:
a
On the Attachments tab of the pending revision, select the row you
want to view.
b
Click Show Versions.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
STEP RESULT: The Versions dialog appears.
c
On the version row for which you want to view redlines, double click
Has been redlined.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you do not replace the attachment file on the
pending revision item prior to the change order release, you can access
the redlines only from the released revision of the item. The following
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
231
MARKUPS
GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS
diagram shows an example of the change order attachment redlining
process.
See also Product Collaboration User Guide and Getting Started with Agile
PLM User Guide.
The following is an example of the change order attachment redlining
process.
232
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKUP PROMOTION
Markup Promotion
NOTE:
This feature is only available for AutoVue for Agile PLM.
Markup promotion is the ability to bring forward, or promote:
•
Change markup promotion between versions within the same pending
revision of the change order.
•
Ad-Hoc markups from older file folder versions to the newer versions.
This allows you to re-validate older markups against a new design.
Markup Promotion for Change-Based Markups
TASK
•
To promote change-based markups in Web Client:
a
Open the change order and display the Affected Items tab.
b
On the Affected Items tab, select the row of the item you want to
redline. The redline tabs for the selected item appear in the lower
section of the Affected Items tab.
c
On the redline Attachments tab, select one or more rows and click
Redline. (This button is active only when markups are allowed).
d
When AutoVue opens, create a new markup. From the AutoVue
Markup menu, select New.
e
From the AutoVue menu, select Open.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
f
Click the All Revisions check mark.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays all valid markups. The available markups
are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you
are viewing.
g
Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup.
h
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The promoted markups display in the file you are currently
viewing.
i
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To save the promoted markups with the change order revision, save the
markups before exiting the viewer. From the AutoVue Markup menu,
choose one of the Save commands.
233
MARKUPS
MARKUP PROMOTION
•
To promote change-based markups in Java Client:
a
Open the change order and display the Affected Items tab.
b
On the Redline Attachments tab, click the Do Redlining icon in the row
containing the file you want to redline.
c
When AutoVue opens, create a new markup. In the AutoVue Markup
menu, choose the New command.
d
In the AutoVue Markup menu, choose the Open command.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
e
Click the All Revisions check mark.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays all valid markups. The available markups
are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you
are viewing.
f
Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup.
g
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The promoted markups display in the file you are currently
viewing.
h
To save the promoted markups with the change order revision, save the
markups before exiting the viewer. From the AutoVue menu, choose
one of the Save commands.
Markup Promotion for Ad-Hoc Markups
TASK
•
To promote file folder ad hoc mark ups in Web Client:
a
Open the file folder object and display the Files tab.
b
To initiate redlining, select the Files table row you want to redline and
then click the Redline.
c
When AutoVue opens, create a new markup. In the viewer Markup
menu, select New.
d
In the AutoVue Markup menu, select Open.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
e
Click the All Revisions check mark.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays all valid markups. The available markups
are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you
are viewing.
234
f
Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup.
g
Click OK.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
STEP RESULT: The promoted markups display in the file you are currently
viewing.
h
•
To save the promoted markups with the current file folder version, save
the markups before exiting the viewer. In the AutoVue Markup menu,
choose one of the Save commands.
To promote file folder ad hoc mark ups in Java Client:
a
Open the file folder object and display the Files tab.
b
Click the Do Redlining(or Has been redlined) on the row of the file you
want to redline. (This button is available only when markups are
allowed.)
c
When AutoVue opens, create a new markup. In the viewer Markup
menu, select New.
d
In the AutoVue Markup menu, choose the Open command.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
e
Click the All Revisions check mark.
STEP RESULT: AutoVue displays all valid markups. The available markups
are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you
are viewing.
f
Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup.
g
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The promoted markups are displayed in the file you are
currently viewing.
h
To save the promoted markups with the current file folder version, save
the markups before exiting the viewer. In the AutoVue Markup menu,
choose one of the Save commands.
Working with Markup Files
Markups can be saved as separate Markup files while working with the same
document. You have the option to add user information to the Markup file, save
and create separate Markup files with different markup IDs, import and export
Markup files, or change the active Markup file.
Saved States
When you create and save a Markup file, with the exception of PDF files, the
view state of the file is also saved. View states include zoom level (extents), rota-
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
235
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
tion settings, transformation, section plane, and visibility. When creating
markups for 3D files containing imported models, the imported design
becomes part of the view state. For EDA files, you can save user-defined layers
sets with markups.
See “Creating a User-Defined View”
State information is also saved with each markup entity. For instance, if you
were at a certain zoom level when you created a markup entity, AutoVue saves
the information with the markup entity. To “Go To” the state you were at when
you created or modified the markup entity, from the Markup tree, right-click
the markup entity and then select Go To.
When selecting Go To feature when viewing PDF files, AutoVue highlights
the markup entity and preserves the current zoom level.
NOTE:
Creating a Markup File
To create a Markup file:
TASK
1.
View a file that you want to markup.
2.
From theMarkup menu, select New.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
New Markup .
RESULT:
AutoVue enters Markup mode and a new Markup file appears in the Markup
Navigation Tree.
See also “Creating a Markup Layer
Entering Markup Information
When creating a markup you can provide user information that you can save
with the markup.
From the Markup menu, select Properties.The Markup Information dialog
appears.
Enter a user name, department, company name, company location, and telephone number. Click OK to save your markup information and to close the
dialog.
236
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
Saving a New Markup File
To save a new Markup file:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Save.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
Save Markup
.
STEP RESULT: The Save Markup File As dialog appears displaying the Markup
Information that you entered when creating the markup.
2.
In the Markup ID field, enter an ID consisting of any combination of
characters or numbers.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT: The Markup file is saved. The markups and the Markup file remain
displayed in the workspace and in the Markup Navigation tree.
Opening Markup Files
To open a Markup file:
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
View a file that has existing markups.
237
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
2.
From the Markup menu, select Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Open
Markup(s)
, or from the bottom-left corner of the status bar, you can click
Markup Indicator .
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If the Markup Indicator icon does not display, then the
file you opened has no existing markups associated to it.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
3.
From the Markup list, select the check box next to Markup file you want
to open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you select more than one Markup file, the Active
Markup menu lets you select which one of them is initially active. See “Setting
the Active Markup File” for more information.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT: The selected markup or markups appear in the workspace on top of the
original file.
When you select more than one Markup file, the markups display simultaneously.
NOTE:
Saving an Existing Markup File
To save a modified existing Markup file, from the Markup menu, select Save.
NOTE:
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Save Markup
.
If you have multiple markups open that you have modified and want to save
them all, from the Markup menu, select Save All.
To save an existing markup as a new markup, from the Markup menu, select
Save As.
Importing a Markup File
To import a Markup file on top of the original file:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Open
Markup(s)
.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
238
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
2.
Click Import.
STEP RESULT: The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears.
3.
Navigate to the markup file that you want to import and select it.
4.
Click Open.
RESULT: The imported Markup file appears in the workspace on top of the original file.
Exporting a Markup File
To export a Markup file:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Save As.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For a new Markup file, you can also click Save Markup
.
STEP RESULT: The Save Markup File As dialog appears.
2.
Click Export.
STEP RESULT: The Save As dialog appears.
3.
Navigate to the location where you want to export the Markup file.
4.
Enter file name.
5.
Click Save.
RESULT:
The Markup file is exported to the selected directory.
The default format saved is Markup Files (*.*), but you can select another one.
In the Save as Type list, there are six formats to choose from:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
•
Markup Files (*.*)
•
DXF Output (*.dfx)
•
AutoCAD DWG (*.dwg)
•
Microstation DGN Output (*.dgn)
239
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES
Setting the Active Markup File
A file can have several Markup files. When you open several Markup files simultaneously, you can set one as the active Markup file. Any changes you make is
applied to the current active markup.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Open
Markup(s) , or from the bottom-left corner of the status bar, you can click
Markup Indicator . If the Markup Indicator icon does not display, the file
you opened has no existing markups associated to it.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
2.
From the Markup list, select the markup or markups you want to open.
3.
From the Active Markup list, select the markup you want to make active.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The selected markups appear in the AutoVue workspace.
Changing the Active Markup File
When you have multiple Markup files open, you can change the active markup.
NOTE:
An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree.
Take one of the following steps:
•
In the tree, right-click the name of the Markup file you want to make
active, then select Set Active.
•
From the Markup toolbar, you can set the active markup by selecting a
markup from the list on the Markup Properties toolbar.
•
Take the following steps:
From the Markup menu, select Set Active.The Set Active Markup dialog
appears.From the Select Active Markup list, select the markup you want to
make active. Click OK to make the selected Markup file active.
240
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS
Working with Markup Layers
Markup files can be divided into layers with each layer having its own unique
name. You can create, name, and color layers to organize your work. For
example, different colors can indicate time priorities and each layer can contain
markups with a common purpose.
When working with markup layers, you can view layers individually or in
combination, add, rename, or delete layers. You can also specify a different
color for each layer.
NOTE:
The default layer color is red.
See also “Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer
Creating a Markup Layer
From the Markup Layers dialog, you can create a markup layer.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Markup Layers.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Layers dialog appears.
2.
Click New.
STEP RESULT: The New Markup Layer dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
241
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS
3.
Enter a name for the markup layer.
4.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The new markup layer is added to the list in the Markup Layers
dialog.
5.
To change the color of the new layer, click Color.
STEP RESULT: The Layer Color dialog appears. The default layer color is red.
6.
Select a color andclick OK.
7.
Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog.
Setting the Active Markup Layer
A markup can have several layers and you can set a layer as the active markup
layer. When a markup layer is active, all modifications you make are applied to
that markup layer. There are two ways in which to set a layer as active:
TASK
1.
From the Markupmenu, select Markup Layers.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Layers dialog appears.
2.
3.
You can perform one of the following:
•
From the Markup Layers list, select the layer you want to make active,
and click Set Active.
•
From the Currently Active Layer list, select the layer you want to make
active.
Click OK.
Changing the Color of a Markup Layer
After you create a markup layer, you have the option to change the color of its
markup entities.
TASK
242
1.
From the Markup menu, select Markup Layers. The Markup Layers
dialog appears.
2.
From the Markup Layers list, select the markup layer whose color you
want to change.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS
3.
Click Color.
STEP RESULT: The Layer Color dialog appears.
4.
Select a Color.
5.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Only the entities that were created with the Bylayer
color defined in the Markup Layers dialog will change color. Any entities that
were created using the color options from the Markup Properties toolbar, will
override the Bylayer
color and will not change.
6.
Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog.
Renaming a Markup Layer
After you create a markup layer, you have the option to rename the layer.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Markup Layers. The Markup Layers
dialog appears.
2.
From the Markup Layers list, select the markup layer you want to
rename.
3.
Click Rename.
STEP RESULT: The New Markup Layer dialog appears.
4.
Enter the new layer name.
5.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The markup layer is assigned the new name.
6.
Click OKto close the Markup Layers dialog.
Toggling between Markup Layers
From the Markup Layers dialog, you can choose to show or hide a layer and its
associated markup entities.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Markup menu, select Markup Layers. The Markup Layers
dialog appears.
243
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS
2.
3.
To show/hide a layer or layers, perform one of the following:
a
Select a layer and click Toggle.The layer’s check box will switch
between selected and deselected. To view all the markup layers, click
All On. To hide all markup layers click All Off.
b
From the Markup Layers list, select the check box next to the layer or
layers you want visible, and deselect the check box next to the layer or
layers you want to hide.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The markup entities belonging to the selected layer or layers appear in the workspace on top of the original file.
Deleting a Markup Layer
From the Markup Layers dialog, you can choose to delete a selected layer and its
associated markup entities.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Markup Layers.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Layers dialog appears.
2.
From the Markup Layers list, select the markup layer you want to delete.
3.
Click Delete.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The layer or layers are deleted along their associated entities.
Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer
Once you create a markup entity, it is possible to assign it to a pre-existing
markup layer.
TASK
1.
244
Select the markup entity or entities that you want to move.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CONSOLIDATING MARKUP FILES
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Move to
Layer.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click the markup entity, select
Format, and then select Move to Layer.
STEP RESULT: The Move to Layer dialog appears.
3.
From the Layers list, select the destination layer.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The selected markup entity or entities are moved to the selected layer. Only
markup entities using the ByLayer color will change to the new layer’s color.
See also “Working with Markup Entities
Consolidating Markup Files
The Consolidate option allows you to create a new Markup file that combines
copies of selected layers of different Markup files. During the review cycle,
consolidation simplifies document revisions by providing the author with one
combined Markup file instead of several Markup files. Note that the Consolidate option is only active when more than one Markup file is opened.
TASK
1.
Open the Markup files that you want to consolidate.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Consolidate.
STEP RESULT: The Consolidate Markups dialog appears.
3.
Select the markup layers that you want to consolidate into one file. To
select multiple layers, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all the layers click Select All, and to deselect
all the layers click UnSelect All.
4.
In the Markup ID field, enter an IDfor the new Markup file.
5.
If you want to open the newly consolidated markup as the active
markup, select the Open as Active Markup check box.
6.
Click OK.
RESULT:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
245
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
The consolidated Markup file is saved. If you selected Open as Active Markup,
the consolidated markup opens and is set as the active markup.
Marking up 2D and 3D Files
AutoVue provides a number of markup options that display the same behavior
when marking up 2D or 3D files. You can add markup entities such as attachments, hyperlinks, signoffs, and stamps.
See “2D-Specific Markups” for information on markup entities that are specific
to 2D files.
See “3D-Specific Markups” for information on markup entities that are specific
to 3D files.
NOTE: When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel the action.
The following tables lists common markup entities for 2D and 3D files.
Option
Attachment
Description
Add an attachment entity to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Attachment
See “Adding an Attachment”
Hyperlink
.
Attaches a hyperlink as a markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Hyperlink
See “Adding a Hyperlink”
Signoff
Creates an approval stamp containing information about the markup
author, date and time of creation.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Signoff
See “Adding Signoff Entities”
Symbol
.
Adds a symbol markup to the document.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Symbol
See “Adding a Symbol”
246
.
.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
Adding an Attachment
In AutoVue, you can attach a file of any type (for example, text, audio, or video)
as a markup entity. The attachment is embedded into the markup entity and
displays as an icon the display.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity,and then select Attachment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Attachment .
2.
Click on the drawing where you want to add an attachment.
STEP RESULT: The Attach Filedialog appears.
3.
In the Link Name field, enter a name for the attachment. Optionally,
you can also provide a brief description of the attachment in the
Description box.
4.
In the URL field, enter the path to the file or click Browse. The File
Open dialog appears.
5.
Select the file or click Browse and click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can attach any local file or any DMS file.
6.
From the Open In list, select one the following:
•
A new applet window: Opens the attachment in a new AutoVue
window.
7.
•
Current applet window: Opens the attachment in the current AutoVue
window.
•
Associated application: Opens the attachment in its associated application.
Click OK to close the Attach File dialog.
STEP RESULT: The attachment appears on the markup workspace and in the
Markup Navigation Tree.
8.
Right-click in the workspace to complete the attachment.
Opening an Attachment
To open an attachment, do one of the following:
•
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Double-click or the attachment icon in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree.
247
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
•
–
If A new applet window was selected while attaching the file, it will
open the attachment in a new AutoVue window.
–
If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file, it
will open in the current AutoVue window.
–
If Associated application was selected while attaching the file, it will
open in its associated application.
In the tree, right-click the attachment entity in the tree, select Attachment, and then select one of the following:
–
Open: The attachment opens in AutoVue.
–
If A new applet window was selected while attaching the file, it will
open in a new AutoVue window.
–
If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file, it
will open in the current AutoVue window.
–
Open With: You have the option to open the attachment with
AutoVue or its Associated Application.
Editing an Attachment
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree, right-click the attachment and select
Edit, or double-click the markup entity.
STEP RESULT: The Attach File dialog appears.
2.
Make your changes and click to OK.
STEP RESULT: The dialog closes and modifications are implemented.
Adding a Hyperlink
A hyperlink is a link between the current file and a new file, a third-party software applicaiton, or a Web page URL. You can create hyperlinks in your current
file so that your outside files, software applications, and Web pages only a click
away. The main benefit of adding hyperlinks is that the files are accessible from
one location but the information is referenced, not duplicated. This ensures a
manageable file size when loading. If changes need to be made to a linked file,
they need to be done in one location—the linked file itself.
248
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
Creating a Hyperlink
TASK
1.
From the Markupmenu, select Add Entity, and then select Hyperlink.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Hyperlink
.
2.
Click a point on the document where you want to place the hyperlink.
STEP RESULT: The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears.
3.
Enter a Link Name.
4.
Optionally, enter a Description.
5.
Type the URL or click Browse to locate the file that you want to link to.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Make sure to include the http:// protocol in the URL. If
the protocol is not included, or if no value is entered in the URL field, then an
error message is thrown when the Hyperlink markup entity is opened.
6.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Open In list, select where you want the hyperlink to open.
249
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
Open in
Description
A new applet window
Opens the file in another AutoVue window.
Current applet window
Opens the file in the current AutoVue window.
A new browser window
Opens the file in the default browser window.
A current browser window
Opens the file in the current browser window.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you are creating a hyperlink to a Web page URL,
then you must select A new browser window.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Right-click to exit hyperlink creation mode.
RESULT:
The hyperlink appears on the Markup.
Opening a Hyperlink
To open a hyperlink, double-click on it from the workspace.
The hyperlink file opens in the window you selected in the Establish Hyperlink
dialog.
Editing a Hyperlink
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace, select the hyperlink that you want to edit.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format,and then select Edit Hyperlink.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click the hyperlink and select
Format, and then select Edit Hyperlink.
STEP RESULT: The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears.
250
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
3.
Edit the information that you want.
4.
Click OK to close the Establish Hyperlink dialog.
RESULT:
The changes are saved.
Deleting a Hyperlink
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace, select the hyperlink that you want to delete.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format,and then select Remove
Hyperlink.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click the hyperlink and select
Format, and then select Remove Hyperlink. You can also delete the hyperlink by selecting the hyperlink and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard.
RESULT:
The hyperlink is deleted.
Adding Signoff Entities
The Signoff entity is an approval stamp containing information about the
markup author, date, and time of creation. You create a signoff entity when the
Markup file is finalized.
If a markup is modified after a signoff is created, the signoff disappears (is
rescinded) from the workspace but remains in the Markup Navigation tree.
Double-click on the signoff entity in the tree to view the signoff history—the person
who rescinded the signoff, the creation date, and the drop date.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity,and then select Signoff.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Signoff
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
251
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
2.
Click and drag to create a box on the drawing where you want the
signoff.
STEP RESULT: The Signoff dialog appears displaying details of the signoff.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The signoff entity appears on the drawing and in the tree, and displays the
author, creation date, and approval date.
Rescinding the Signoff
You can rescind a signoff on a drawing.
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation tree or in the workspace, double-click the
signoff markup entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Signoff
.
STEP RESULT: The Signoff dialog appears.
2.
Click Rescind.
RESULT:
The signoff disappears from the drawing but remains in the Markup Navigation
Tree.
Re-Approving a Signoff
To re-approve the signoff that has been rescinded:
TASK
1.
In the tree, double-click the signoff markup entity.
STEP RESULT: The Signoff dialog appears.
2.
Click Approve.
RESULT:
The signoff entity re-appears on the drawing and the tree.
252
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
Viewing the History of a Signoff
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Signoff.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Signoff
.
2.
Click History.
STEP RESULT: The Signoff History dialog appears displaying the author, date
and time the signoff was created.
3.
Click Cancel to close the Signoff dialog.
Adding a Symbol
A Symbol1is a graphical entity, such as a company logo. Before a graphic entity
can be used as a Symbol, it must be added to a Symbol Library.
You can create a Symbol Library and add Symbols to it. You can also add or
remove Symbols from existing libraries.
When a Symbol is created, the graphic entity is converted to a Windows
Metafile Format (WMF). As a result, the resulting graphic in the Symbol may
differ from the original image as it has been converted to another format. In order
to avoid these discrepancies in the output, it is recommended to use AutoCAD
formats as the graphical entity. However, you may still use any 2D/raster image
NOTE:
1. In previous releases of AutoVue, a Symbol markup entity was called a Stamp.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
253
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
as the graphical entity, but differences between the Sybmol and native file should
be expected.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Symbol.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Symbol
.
STEP RESULT: The Symbols dialog appears.
2.
Click the Symbols tab.
3.
From the Symbol Library list, select the library from which you want to
select a Symbol.
STEP RESULT: The Symbols appear for the selected library.
254
4.
Click Isotropic if you want to scale the Symbol proportionately.
5.
Click Anisotropic if you want to scale the Symbol disproportionately.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES
6.
Drag the Symbol onto the workspace.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more Symbols, repeat steps 3 to 5.
STEP RESULT: The Symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree.
7.
Close the Symbols dialog.
Creating a New Symbol Library
Once a Symbol library is created, the existing library should not be modified. If it
is modified, it will not be possible to add or remove existing symbols.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select
Symbol.The Symbols dialog appears.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Symbol
.
2.
Click the Libraries tab.
3.
Click Create.
STEP RESULT: The Symbol Library dialog appears.
4.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Enter the library name, description, author, and keywords in their
respective fields.
255
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
5.
To add a symbol to the library, click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Open dialog appears.
6.
Browse to locate the symbol you want to add, and then click Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more symbol, repeat steps 4 to 6. To remove a
symbol, select the symbol and click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The file appears in the Symbol Files list.
7.
Close the Symbol dialog.
Deleting a Symbol Library
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Symbol.
The Symbols dialog appears.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Symbol
.
2.
Click the Libraries tab.
3.
From the Symbol Libraries list, select the library that you want to delete.
4.
Click Delete.
STEP RESULT: The library disappears from the list and from the Symbol Library
list under the Symbols tab.
5.
Close the Symbols dialog.
2D-Specific Markups
AutoVue provides a variety of user-friendly markup options that you can use
when marking up 2D files. You can create entities such as arcs, boxes, circles,
clouds, lines, and polygons. You can draw a leader with multi-line segments and
add text to it.
NOTE:
When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel.
256
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
2D Markup Entities
You can create many different types of 2D markup entities. To access the
markup entities, from the Markup menu, select Add Entity. The available 2D
markup entities are listed in the following table.
Markup Entity
Arc
Entity Information
Click and drag the mouse to draw an Arc.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
Box
.
Click and drag to draw a rectangle.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Box
.
To draw a square instead of a rectangle, press and hold the Shiftkey
while you click and drag.
Cloud
Click and drag to draw a Cloud.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Cloud
Circle
.
Click and drag to draw a circle.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Circle
.
To draw a circle instead of an ellipse, press and hold the Shiftkey while
you click and drag.
Freestyle
Create freestyle entities.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Freestyle
See “Adding a Freestyle Entity”
Highlight
.
Click and drag to highlight a boxed area.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Highlight
The highlighted box will be filled with a transparent color.
Leader
Create leader entities.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Leader
See “Adding a Leader”
Line
.
.
Click and drag to draw a line.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Line
.
To draw a line and force it to be aligned to the closer axis, horizontal
or vertical, press and hold theShiftkey while you click and drag.
See “Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes”
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
257
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Markup Entity
Measurement
Entity Information
Create markup measure entities.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
,
Area
, Angle
, Arc
, or Minimum Distance
.
See “Creating 2D non-Vector Markup Measure Entities”
“Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities”
“Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities”
Note
Add a note to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Note
See “Adding a Note”
Polygon
.
Click and drag to draw a polygon.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Polygon
Polyline
.
Click and drag to draw a polyline.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Polyline
.
To force a line segment in a Polyline entity to be aligned to the closer
axis, horizontal or vertical, press and hold the Shift key while you click
and drag for that line segment.
See “Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes”
Stamp
Adds a Stamp to a document that includes specific document and user
information (metadata) pulled directly from the
DMS/ERP/PLM/UCM system.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Stamp
See “Creating a Stamp”
Text
.
Add text to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Text
See “Adding Text”
.
Adding a Freestyle Entity
You can create a freestyle markup entity. You have the option of making the
entity non-contiguous or contiguous.
Creating a Contiguous Freestyle Entity
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity,and then select Freestyle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Freestyle
.
258
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
2.
Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle
entity.
3.
Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity.
4.
Right-click to end the Freestyle entity.
Creating a Non-Contiguous Freestyle Entity
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Freestyle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Freestyle
.
2.
Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle
entity.
3.
Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity.
4.
Click a point on the drawing where you want to interrupt the Freestyle
entity.
5.
Click another point on the drawing where you want to restart the Freestyle entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can interrupt the Freestyle entity as many times
as you like by repeating steps 4 and 5.
6.
Right-click to end the Freestyle entity.
Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes
A line segment drawn with the Free Snap snapping mod can be forced to align
with the closer horizontal or vertical axis. You can also take an existing line
segment and have it align with the closer axis. The types of line segments that
you can align are lines, line segments of leaders and polylines, and measure entities.
See “2D Vector Snapping Modes”for more information Free Snap.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To draw and force a line segment, press and hold the Shift key while
you click and drag for that line segment.
259
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
2.
To force an existing line segment, click and hold the left mouse button
on the line segment, then press and hold the Shift key.
3.
When you see that the line segment is horizontal or vertical, release the
left mouse button, then release the Shift key.
Adding a Leader
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Leader.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Leader
.
2.
Click a point on the document where define the Leader anchor point.
3.
Move the cursor to draw the Leader.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To draw a Leader segment and force it to be aligned
to the closest axis, vertical or horizontal, hold the Shift key while moving the
cursor.
4.
To draw a Leader with multiple line segments, repeat steps 2 and 3 as
often as you like. You can click, then drag as often as you like.
5.
Right-click to end the Leader. A text box appears at the end of the
Leader.
6.
In the text box, enter the text you want to attach to the Leader.
STEP RESULT: The height of the text box will resize to fit the entered text.
7.
To change text box font properties, from the Markup menu, select
Format, and then select Font.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective font property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the font type, style, and size
STEP RESULT: The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type,
style, and size.
8.
Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog.
9.
To change the line properties or fill color of the Leader, select the
Leader, then from the Markup menu, select Format, and then select
the property or properties you want to change.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective line property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the line style, line thickness, fill types,
and fill colors.
260
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
10.
Right-click outside the text area to complete the modification.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To edit the Leader text, double-click the Leader in the
tree or in the workspace.
STEP RESULT: The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation
Tree.
Creating 2D non-Vector Markup Measure Entities
When marking up 2D non-vector files, in addition to all the markup options
available for 2D files, you can create markup measure entities. The measure
options in Markup mode work a bit differently than in View mode.
See “2D-Specific Markups”
When measuring in Markup mode, the specified measurement lines and values
are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities. These entities can
be moved, resized, or deleted. You can also modify the font of a measure entity,
align a “free snap” measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis, as well as add
units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the
drawing.
NOTE: When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel.
Measure options vary between vector and non-vector files. For vector files,
AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to fixed points on the drawing. For
non-vector files, you can only “free snap”.
In Markup mode, you can choose from several measure options to create
markup measure entities. From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then
select Measurement to access the following measure options:
Option
Angle
Description
Measure the angle between selected points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Angle
Arc
Measure an arc entity.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
Area
.
Measure a selected area.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Area
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
.
.
261
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Option
Distance
Description
Measure the distance between two points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
.
Measuring Distance
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points.
See “Changing Measurement Units and Symbols”
“Changing Font”
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.From the
Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance .
2.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
3.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
4.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active
markup.
5.
Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the
measure distance.
STEP RESULT: The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the
current active markup layer. The measured distance, Delta-X, and Delta-Y
appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog.
6.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
7.
You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
8.
262
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Measuring Cumulative Distance
Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of
multi-faceted (adjoining) points.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.From the
Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
.
2.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
3.
Select Cumulative.
4.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
5.
Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line.
6.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, cumulated measurement and unit
appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer. The cumulated measured distance, Delta-X, and Delta-Y appear in the Measurement
Entities dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
263
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
Measuring Area
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Area.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Area .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
From the Measured Area Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the area.
3.
From the Perimeter Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the perimeter.
4.
To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas, select Add.
5.
To subtract an area from the Net Area Result, select Subtract.
6.
Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field.
7.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
8.
Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the area you want to
measure.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line.
9.
Right click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
10.
264
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Angle
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
3.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure:
•
The first click defines the starting point of the angle measurement.
•
The second click defines the vertex of the angle measurement.
•
The third click defines the endpoint of the angle measurement.
•
The points are joined by angle arms with an arc connecting them.
4.
Move the cursor to increase or decrease the radial and arc length.
5.
Click again to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, angle measurement and unit appear in a
value box entity on the current active markup layer. The measured angle also
appears in the Measurement Entities dialog.
6.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
7.
You can click and drag the value box anywhere on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
8.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius, center
and diameter.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Arc.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
265
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
2.
From the Arc Info Length list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the arc.
3.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle. The options are degrees or radians.
4.
Select Add Radius if you want to measure the radius of the arc.
5.
Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter of the arc.
6.
Click three points on the drawing to define the arc you want to
measure.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc.
7.
Click again to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, arc measurement and unit appear in a
value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement
Entities dialog.
8.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
9.
You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
10.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
266
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Creating a Stamp
In previous releases of AutoVue, Stamp markup entities were called Intellistamp.
NOTE:
The Stamp markup entity lets you create a stamp that includes document and
user information (metadata) pulled directly from the backend
DMS/ERP/PLM/UCM system.
The Stamp is only available if a system administrator has defined and
configured the Stamp.
NOTE:
A Stamp can retrieve a document’s attributes directly from the backend system.
They can also update attributes from the Stamp to the document in the backend
system.
Backend system attributes that the Stamp can read and write to can be simple
values or a list of values. When lists are constrained, you can only select from
the pre-defined list. When lists are non-constrained, you can enter a value that
is not in the drop-down list. When an attribute is a multi-valued attribute,
AutoVue lets you select multiple values from the drop-down list. In this case,
values are separated by a semi-colon (;).
As of AutoVue 20.2, Stamps are disabled for 3D files. Existing stamps that were
defined in previous releases of AutoVue can still be viewed but cannot be modified.
Adding a Stamp
To add a Stamp markup entity to a document, do the following:
TASK
1.
Enter Markup mode.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Stamp.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Stamp .
STEP RESULT: The Stamp dialog appears.
3.
From the Choose Stamp box, select the desired Stamp and then click
OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If the Enable Resizing check box is selected then the
Stamp can be resized in the workspace. If the check box is grayed out, then the
Stamp is not resizable and has a set size.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
267
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
4.
In the workspace, click and drag a box to the desired Stamp size.
STEP RESULT: The Stamp dialog closes and the Stamp appears in workspace and
in the Markup Entity Tree.
Manipulating a Stamp
NOTE:
This feature is only available for Client/Server deployments.
Depending on how the Stamp is configured, it may appear as a fized size in the
workspace or it may be resizable. If it is resizable, you can select the stamp
outline and drag to the desired size. If the isotropic option is selected on the
stamp, it resizes proportionally in all directions. To resize the stamp
non-proportionally, your system administrator must update the Stamp definition.
Depending the format of the background image, when resizing the Stamp, attributes and/or text may not align properly with the background image. To avoid
this issue, Enhanced Metafiles (EMF) should be used as the background image.
Refer to the Oracle AutoVue Client/Server Deployment Installation and Configuration Guide for more information.
If the Stamp is configured to retrieve backend system attributes, then the values
of these attributes are displayed on the Stamp in the workspace.
To modify the text font on the Stamp, select the required font and style from the
Markup toolbar.
The Copy/Paste feature for Stamps is not supported. If you copy a group of entities that has a Stamp, the Stamp is excluded from the Copy/Paste function.
Viewing/Modifying Stamp Attributes
The section describes how to view and modify Stamp attributes.
If your Stamp is configured to read backend attritbutes, then the Stamp entity
displays these backend attributes. Reading values from the backend can be done
once during Stamp creation (the attribute is configured with the ReadOnce
permission by the system administrator) or the backend values can be read
when requested (the attribute is configured with the Read permission by the
system administrator). The following describes each attribute.
268
•
If an attribute is configured with the Edit permission, then you can modify
the value of the attribute on the Stamp.
•
If an attribute is configured with the Write permission, then you can save
the value on the Stamp to backend system.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Provided that you have permissions to update the attribute on the
backend system.
NOTE:
•
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
If an attribute is configured with the Hidden permission, then you cannot
see the attribute on the Stamp. However, you can view the attribute in the
Edit dialog and when editing the Stamp.
269
MARKUPS
2D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
•
If an attribute is configured with the current date or user name default
values, then these values are displayed on the Stamp (only if no value is
retrieved from the backend system)
TASK
1.
You can view the attributes of a Stamp by double-clicking the Stamp
markup entity. The DMS Attributes dialog appears and lists all attributes of the Stamp.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: All attributes tagged as Hidden during Stamp design
also display in the DMS Attributes dialog.
The dialog contains three columns that include attribute values defined in the
design stage:
2.
270
•
The Name column displays the attribute name as defined in the design
stage. It either displays the backend DMS/ERP/PLM/UCM
system-defined attribute name or the user-defined name.
•
The Value column displays the value that is currently on the Stamp.
•
The Value from DMS column displays the value assigned from the
backend system.
To modify any value of the Stamp, double-click the Value cell corresponding to the attribute.
•
If the attribute does not have Edit permissions, the value cannot be
modified.
•
If the attribute is defined as Hidden, then the attribute is displayed in the
DMS Attributes dialog. You may edit the value of a Hidden attribute, but
it does not display in the workspace.
•
If the attribute is a non-constrained list, then you may either select a
value from the list or enter your own value. If the attribute is a
constrained list, you may only select from the list.
•
If the attribute is a multi-valued list, then you may select a value from the
list. AutoVue appends this value to any pre-existing values using a
semi-colon (;) as a separator.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
•
If an attribute is defined with Hidden permissions, then the value from
the DMS column reflects the value read during Stamp creation. It does
not reflect the current value in the DMS.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: After a change is made to a value cell, you must press
Tab or Enter to finalize the changes.
3.
To commit changes to values for backend system attributes, click
Commit Changes.
4.
To reset changes and revert to backend system values, click Reset.
5.
When you are done modifying the attributes, click OK to finalize your
changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog.
RESULT:
The Stamp is updated to reflect any changes you made.
Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities
When marking up 2D vector files, in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files, you can create markup measure entities. The measure options
in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode.
Measure options vary between vector and non-vector files. For vector files,
AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to fixed points on the drawing. For
non-vector files, you can only “free snap”.
When measuring in Markup mode, the specified measurement lines and values
are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities. These entities can
be moved, resized, hidden or deleted. You can also modify the font of a measure
entity, align a “free snap” measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis, as well
as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear
on the drawing.
NOTE: When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel.
In Markup mode, you can choose from several measure options to create
markup measure entities. From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then
select Measurement to access the following measure options:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
271
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Option
Description
Angle
Measure the angle between selected points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Angle
Arc
.
Measure an arc entity.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
Area
.
Measure a selected area.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Area
Distance
.
Measure the distance between two points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
.
2D Vector Snapping Modes
The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points
on a drawing. For example, if you select Snap to End-Point and you move the
cursor over an end-point of a line, the end-point will be highlighted by a snap
box.
The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid, center, and end-points of an
entity:
Button
Snap to
Description
End-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near a linear component’s end point.
Mid-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear
component.
Center-point
Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when
moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical
component.
Free snap
Allow snapping at any point on the drawing.
When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all
snapping modes (All On) or to turn off snapping modes (All Off)
NOTE:
The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements:
272
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Measurement
Snapping Location
Area
Snaps to a shape on the drawing.
Arc
Snaps to an arc on the drawing.
Angle
Snap to two non-parallel lines.
Measuring Distance
Use the Distanceoption to measure the distance between two specific points.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.From the
Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance .
2.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
3.
To select all snapping modes click All On. To clear all snapping modes
click All Off.
4.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
5.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
6.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected Cumulative, continue clicking points
along the path that you want to measure.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active
markup.
7.
Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the
measure distance.
STEP RESULT: The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the
current active markup layer. The measured distance, Delta-X, and Delta-Y
appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog.
8.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
9.
You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To make another measurement, click Reset.
10.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
273
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Measuring Cumulative Distance
Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of
multi-faceted (adjoining) points.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Distance .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
3.
To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect all snapping
modes, click All Off.
4.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
5.
Select Cumulative.
6.
Click the first entity to define the starting point.
7.
Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line.
8.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measured distance, Delta-X,
Delta-Y and the “Manhattan Distance” appear in the Measurement Entities
dialog.
9.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
274
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
Measuring Area
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Analysis menu, select Measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Measure
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement dialog appears.
2.
Click the Area tab.
3.
Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points
on a drawing. The snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
5.
Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on
the drawing; the snapping modes are disabled.
6.
From the Measured Area Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the area.
7.
From the Perimeter Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the perimeter.
8.
In the Net Area Result section of the dialog, select Add to cumulate a
net area result of different areas.
9.
To subtract an area from the Net Area Result, select Subtract.
10.
Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result.
11.
If you selected Between Points, click points on the drawing to define
the area.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line. The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
275
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
12.
If you selected Shape, click the edge of the predefined shape that you
want to measure.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The shape is highlighted. The area and perimeter measurements
appear in the Measurement dialog.
13.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Angle .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three
points. The snapping modes are displayed.
STEP RESULT: The snapping modes are displayed.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
4.
Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two
lines.
5.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
6.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points on the drawing to
define the angle. If you selected Between 2 lines, click two lines on the
drawing to define the angle.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them.
7.
Click again to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measurement appears in
theMeasurement Entities dialog.
276
8.
To change the size of the arc, click and drag it to the desired size.
9.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the markup.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
10.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
11.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius, length and angles of any arc
on the model. It also calculates the center point location.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, Measurement, and then
Arc.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
STEP RESULT: All arc and circles are highlighted on the model. Snapping modes
are disabled.
3.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the
model.
5.
From the Dist. Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure
the arc distance.
6.
From the Angles Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure
the angle.
7.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc.
8.
If you selected Arc Entity, click the edge of an arc.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted.
9.
Click to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measurements for arc
center coordinates, radius, diameter, ratio, arc length, start and end of angle
and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
10.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the markup.
277
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
11.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
12.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities
When marking up EDA files, in addition to all the markup options available for
2D files, you can create markup measure entities. The measure options in
Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode.
See “2D-Specific Markups”
NOTE: When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel.
When measuring in Markup mode, the specified measurement lines and values
are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities. These entities can
be moved, resized, or deleted. You can also modify the font of a measure entity,
align a “free snap” measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis, as well as add
278
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the
drawing.
AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to geometrical or electrical points on the
drawing.
In Markup mode, you can choose from several measure options to create
markup measure entities. From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then
select Measurement to access the following measure options:
Option
Angle
Description
Measure the angle between selected points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Angle
Arc
.
Measure an arc entity.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
Area
.
Measure a selected area.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Area
Distance
.
Measure the distance between two points.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
Minimum Distance
.
Measure the minimum distance between entities.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, click Minimum Distance
.
EDA Snapping Modes
The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical
points. For example, when you select Snap to Pin, move the cursor over the pin
you want to select until the pin is highlighted, then click. Highlight and click a
second pin to measure the distance between them.
The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle, center, and end-points of
an entity, as well as a pin, via, and symbol. The following table outlines the available snapping modes:
Button
Snap To
End-point
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Description
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the entity’s end point.
279
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Button
Snap To
Description
Mid-point
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the halfway point of a
linear entity.
Center-point
Geometric snap mode
where a snap box appears
when moving the cursor
near the center of an entity.
Pin
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a pin.
Via
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a via.
Symbol origin
Electrical snap mode where
a snap box appears when the
cursor touches a
component.
Free snap
Allows snapping at any
point on the drawing.
Net
Allows snapping to a net.
Trace
Allows snapping to a trace.
Measuring Distance
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Distance
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
280
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
3.
To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect all snapping
modes, click All Off.
4.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
5.
Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point.
6.
Click another point on the drawing to define the end point.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by a line. The measured line path appears as
an entity on the current active markup.
7.
Drag to move the measured line path.
8.
Click on the measured line path.
STEP RESULT: The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the
current active markup layer. The measured distance, Delta-X, Delta-Y and the
“Manhattan Distance” appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
9.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
10.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Measuring Cumulative Distance
Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of
multi-faceted (adjoining) points.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Distance .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
3.
To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect all snapping
modes, click All Off.
4.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
5.
Select Cumulative.
6.
Click the first entity to define the starting point.
281
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
7.
Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line.
8.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measured distance, Delta-X,
Delta-Y and the “Manhattan Distance” appear in the Measurement Entities
dialog.
9.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
282
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Measuring Area
Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Area.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Area .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points
on a drawing. Snapping modes are displayed.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect
all snapping modes, click All Off.
4.
Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on
the drawing.
5.
From the Measured Area Units list, select the unit in which you want to
measure the area.
6.
From the Perimeter Units list, select the unitin which you want to
measure the perimeter.
7.
To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas, select Add in the
Measurement Entities dialog.
8.
To subtract an area from the Net Area Result, select Subtract.
9.
Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field.
10.
If you selected Between Points, click points on the drawing to define
the area.
STEP RESULT: Each point is joined by a line and the measurement appears in the
Measurement Entities dialog.
11.
If you selected Shape, click the edge of a predefined shape on the
drawing.
STEP RESULT: The shape is highlighted.
12.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
13.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
283
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Angle .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect
all snapping modes, click All Off.
4.
Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two
lines.
5.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
6.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the angle.
7.
If you selected Between 2 Lines, click two lines to define the angle.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them.
8.
Right-click to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measured angle appears in
the Measurement Entities dialog.
9.
To change the size of the arc, click and drag the it to the desired size.
10.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing.
11.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
12.
284
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius, center
and diameter.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Arc.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select all snapping modes, click All On. To deselect
all snapping modes, click All Off.
4.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
5.
From the Arc Info list, select the unit in which you want to measure the
distance of the arc.
6.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unitin which you want to
measure the angle.
7.
Select Add Radius if you want measure the radius.
8.
Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter.
9.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc.
10.
If you selected an Arc Entity, click an edge of the arc.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted.
11.
Click to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer.The measurements for center
point coordinates, radius, diameter, arc length, start and end of angle and
sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
12.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing.
13.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
14.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
285
MARKUPS
CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring Minimum Distance
Use theMinimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between
entities. The available entities for snapping are nets, pins, vias and traces.
To measure the minimum distance between entities on separate layers, select
Across Layers. If a physical layer does not exist, this option determines whether
or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Minimum Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Minimum Distance .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Click
First Setto select the entities that you want to measure from.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you select Net, you cannot select any other type of
entity.
286
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
ADDING TEXT
4.
Click the first set of entities on the drawing.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To clear the last set of entities you selected, click Clear
Set.
STEP RESULT: The entities are highlighted.
5.
Click
Second Set to select the entities that you want to measure to.
6.
Click the second set of entities on the drawing.
STEP RESULT: The entities are highlighted in a different color.
7.
From the Measured Min. Distance list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
8.
Select Zoom to Result, if you want to zoom in on the measured value
on the drawing.
9.
Click Compute.
STEP RESULT: The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second
set is highlighted by a line. The measured line path, measurement and unit
appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer. The measurement, Delta-X, Delta-Y, and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
10.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing.
11.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
12.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Adding Text
With AutoVue, you can add a text box entity to a markup.
NOTE: When copying and pasting text from a Rich Text file (RTF) into the
AutoVue workspace, the text gets added to a Markup Note entity. When copying
and pasting text from a plan text file to the AutoVue workspace, it is added to a
Markup Text Box entity.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Text.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Text .
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
287
MARKUPS
ADDING TEXT
2.
Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box.
3.
Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The height of the text box will adjust to accommodate
the text.
4.
To change text box font properties, from the Markup menu, select
Format, and then select Font.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective font property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the font type, style, and size.
STEP RESULT: The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type,
style, and size.
5.
Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog.
6.
To change the line properties or fill color of the text box, select the text
box, then from the Markup menu, select Format, and then select the
property or properties you want to change.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective line property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the line style, line thickness, fill types,
and fill colors.
7.
Right-click outside the text area to complete the modification.
STEP RESULT: The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation
Tree.
8.
To move the text box click and drag it.
9.
Click and drag the frame handles of the text box to enlarge it.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To edit the text, double-click the text box in the tree or
in the workspace.
Hiding the box surrounding the text
TASK
1.
Select the text box entity.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Markup
Entity Attributes.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears.
3.
From the Text Box Visibility list, select OFF.
4.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To undo, repeat steps 1 through 4, except selectON.
STEP RESULT: The dialog closes and the text box is hidden.
288
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
ADDING A NOTE
Adding a Note
You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing. A
note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol . Each
note is labelled as Note<n>—where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note (for example, the first note is labelled as Note1). To read the
note, double-click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to
display the tooltip.
When copying and pasting text from a Rich Text file (RTF) into the
AutoVue workspace, the text gets added to a Markup Note entity. When copying
and pasting text from a plan text file to the AutoVue workspace, it is added to a
Markup Text Box entity.
NOTE:
When creating multiple Note entities, it is possible to group the entities.
Once the Note entities are grouped, clicking on the group opens the last Note
created.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Note.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Note
.
2.
Click a point on the document where you want to insert the note.
STEP RESULT: A new markup note entity is created and the Note editor appears.
3.
Enter the text that you want in the Note editor.
4.
From the File menu, select Note Information.
STEP RESULT: The Note Information dialog appears.
5.
To change the default font, select Font and the type of font.
6.
Close the Note editor.
STEP RESULT: The note symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree.
7.
Right-click outside the note area to complete the modification.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To edit a note, double-click on the note.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
289
MARKUPS
NESTING MARKUP ENTITIES
Printing a Note
You can print a single Markup Note entity.
TASK
1.
From the AutoVue Workspace or Markup tree, double-click a Markup
Note entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Note dialog appears.
2.
From the Note dialog, select File and then Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Print dialog appears.
3.
Select the a printer and click OK.
Nesting Markup Entities
You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other
markup entites.
TASK
1.
Add a markup entity to a file (for example, a Box entity).
2.
From the workspace or Markup Tree, select the Box entity.
3.
From the Markup menu, select Note or Hyperlink.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Note
or Hyperlink
.
RESULT:
In the Markup Tree, the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box
(parent) entity.
290
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
3D-Specific Markups
When marking up 3D files, you can attach text or a note, as well as create
markup measure entities. The measure options in Markup mode work slightly
different than in View mode.
NOTE:
When you are creating a markup entity, you can press the Escape key to
cancel.
3D Markup Entities
You can create many different types of markup entities. To access the markup
entities, from the Markup menu, select Add Entity. The markup entities are:
Option
Text
Description
Add text to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click 3D Text
See “Adding Text”
Attachment
.
Add an attachment entity to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Attachment
.
See “Adding an Attachment”
Hyperlink
Click the workspace to attach a hyperlink.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Hyperlink
.
See “Adding a Hyperlink”
Measurement
Create markup measure entities.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
Area
, Angle
, Arc ,or Minimum Distance
See “Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities”
Note
.
Add a note to the markup.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Note
See “Adding a Note”
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
,
.
291
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Option
Signoff
Description
Create an approval stamp containing information about the
markup author, date and time of creation.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Signoff
See “Adding Signoff Entities”
.
Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities
When marking up 3D files, you can create markup measure entities. The
measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode.
When measuring in Markup mode, the specified measurement lines and values
are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities. These entities can
be moved, resized, or deleted.
If you manipulate a part of a model, the measure entity values do not
update accordingly.
NOTE:
AutoVue provides the option to “snap” to different entity types on the model.
In Markup mode, you can choose from several measurement options to create
markup measure entities. From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then
select Measurement to access the following measure options:
Name
Angle
Description
Measure the precise angle between three vertices or any two
edges, planes or faces.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Angle
Arc
Measure the precise radius, length and angle of any arc and
calculate the center point location.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
Distance
.
.
Measure the precise distance between any two Vertex, Edge,
Midedge, Arc Center or Face.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Distance
Minimum Distance
.
Measure minimum distance between any two Vertex, Edge,
Midedge, Arc Center or Face.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Minimum
Distance
.
You cannot create a markup measure entity when measuring
minimum distance.
292
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Name
Description
Vertex Coordinates
Provide the coordinates of each vertex.
From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Vertex
Coordinates
.
3D Snapping Modes
Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model.
For example, if you select Vertex, all vertices are highlighted and a snap box
appears when you move the cursor over a vertex.
Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities.
The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected
measurement option. For example, the behavior of arc center is not the same for
distance and minimum distance.
NOTE:
Button
Vertex
Edge (Line)
Description
Behavior
Highlights vertices on
the model.
A snap box appears when you hover the mouse
pointer over a vertex.
Highlights edges on the
model.
The edge is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
When measuring Minimum Distance, the
finite edge is selected. However, when measuring
Distance, the infinite edge is selected.
NOTE:
Edge Middle
Arc
Arc Center
Highlights edges on the
model.
The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears
indicating the middle edge coordinate when you
hover the mouse pointer.
Highlights arcs on the
model.
The arc is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
Highlights arcs and
circles on the model.
The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears
indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc
when you hover the mouse pointer.
When measuring Minimum Distance, the
arc center is selected. However, when measuring
Distance, the infinite arc axis is selected.
NOTE:
Face (Plane)
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Highlights faces when
you move the cursor
over a face.
The face is highlighted when you hover the
mouse pointer.
293
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Measuring Distance
Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices, edges, arc
axes, faces or any combination of these entity types.
To revert to the Point to Point distance measurement, set the
SHOW_POINTOPOINT_PAGE INI option. Refer to theInstallation and Configuration Guide for more information.
NOTE:
The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured
using snapping modes.
294
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Snapping
Mode
Entities
Vertex
Line
Arc Center
Plane
Vertex
Distance
between two
points.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the
line.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the arc.
The shortest
segment
connecting the
point and the
plane.
Distance between
two lines.
The line and axis
must be parallel.
Distance between
the line and arc
axis.
The distance
between the line
and the plane.
Line
The lines
must be parallel.
NOTE:
Arc
Center
The line
must be parallel
to the plane.
NOTE:
Distance between
the axes of the
arcs.
Distance between
the arc axis and
the plane.
Arc planes
must be parallel.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Plane
The plane
and the arc plane
must be perpendicular.
Distance between
the two planes.
The planes
must be parallel.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity,Measurement, and then
Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Distance .
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
From the Measured Distance Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the distance.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: See “3D Snapping Modes” for more information.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the
model.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
295
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
4.
On the model, select the entity you want to measure from.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you want to take more than one measurement from
the same starting point, select the Fix Position check box.
STEP RESULT: The location of the entity appears in the From
field.
5.
Click inside the To
measure to.
field to select the entity type that you want to
6.
Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for
the measurement.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the
model.
7.
On the model, select the entity you want to measure to.
STEP RESULT: The location of the entity appears in the To
8.
field.
Click again to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path appears in a value box entity on the
current active markup. The measured distance, Delta-X, Delta-Y and Delta-Z
appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
9.
Drag to move the measured line path.
10.
Click on the measured line path.
11.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing.
12.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
13.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Calibrating Distance
Calibrate the distance measurement.
TASK
1.
Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance.
2.
From the Distance tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance
296
3.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to calibrate the
distance.
4.
Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the
distance to a value.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
5.
Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog.
7.
Click Close to close the Distance tab.
Measuring an Angle
Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add entity, select Measurement, and
then select Angle.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Angle
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Click the Angle tab.
3.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
STEP RESULT: Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model.
4.
To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane, select the
With Plane check box, and then select the plane from the list.
5.
From the Measured Angle Units list, select the unit in which you want
to measure the angle.
6.
Click two points on the model to define the angle.
7.
If you selected a Plane, click the vertex, edge or face whose angle you
want to measure between the plane.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To take another measurement click Reset.
STEP RESULT: Angle arms appears indicating the angle.The measurement
appears in theMeasurement dialog.
8.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
297
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Measuring an Arc
Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius, length and angles of any arc
on the model. It also calculates the center point location.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, Measurement, and then
Arc.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click Arc
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc.
STEP RESULT: All arc and circles are highlighted on the model. Snapping modes
are disabled.
3.
Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three
points. Snapping modes are displayed.
4.
Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring.
STEP RESULT: All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the
model.
5.
From the Dist. Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure
the arc distance.
6.
From the Angles Units list, select the unit in which you want to measure
the angle.
7.
If you selected From 3 Points, click three points to define the arc.
STEP RESULT: The points are joined by an arc.
8.
If you selected Arc Entity, click the edge of an arc.
STEP RESULT: The arc is highlighted.
9.
Click to complete the measurement.
STEP RESULT: The measured line path, measurement and unit appear in a value
box entity on the current active markup layer. The measurements for arc
center coordinates, radius, diameter, ratio, arc length, start and end of angle
and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog.
10.
To move the value box, click and drag it to anywhere on the markup.
11.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
12.
298
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
Calibrating an Arc
TASK
1.
Measure an arc in the drawing.
2.
From the Arc tab, click Calibrate.
STEP RESULT: The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured
distance.
3.
From the Units list, select a unit of measurement to which you want to
calibrate the distance.
4.
Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value.
5.
Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor.
6.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: The calibration results appear in the Arc tab.
7.
Click Close to close the Measurement dialog.
Measuring Minimum Distance
With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance
between model parts, as well as any two points from the selection sets: vertices,
edges, mid-edges, arc axes, arc centers, faces or any combination of entity types.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, Measurement, and then
select Minimum Distance.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Minimum Distance
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears.
2.
Click
Set 1.
3.
From the Snapping Mode section, select one of the following:
•
Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts.
Snapping modes are disabled.
•
Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity
types. Snapping modes are displayed.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: See “3D Snapping Modes” for more information.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
299
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
4.
If you selected Entity, select a part or parts on the model. If you selected
Geometry, select the snapping modes that you want to use for
measuring.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To reset a set, click Clear. To clear items from a set,
select the items and press the Delete key. To deselect a part or entity type on
the model, press the Control key and left-click the part or entity type.
STEP RESULT: The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted
on the model and in the Model Tree. All entities of the selected entity type are
highlighted on the model.
5.
Click
Set 2.
6.
Repeat step 3 and 4.
STEP RESULT: The model part appears in the list under Set 2.
7.
From the Measured Min. Distance Units list, select the unit in which you
want to measure the distance.
8.
Click Compute.
STEP RESULT: The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second
set is highlighted by a line. The measured line path, measurement and unit
appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer. The X, Y and
Z coordinates for Position 1 and X, Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear
in the Measurement Entities dialog.
9.
Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup.
10.
To resize the value box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
11.
Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog.
Measuring Vertex Coordinates
The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the
model.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, Measurement, and then
Vertex Coordinate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Vertex Coordinate
.
STEP RESULT: The Measurement Entities dialog appears. All vertices on the
model are highlighted.
300
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
2.
Scroll over the vertex whose coordinates you want to add to the
markup.
STEP RESULT: The X, Y, and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip.
3.
Click the vertex.
STEP RESULT: The X, Y, an Z coordinates and unit appear a value box entity on
the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog.
4.
Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Click Reset to take another measurement.
STEP RESULT: Click and drag the frame handles to enlarge the value box.
5.
To remove the highlighted vertices on the model, click Close in the
Measurement Entities dialog.
Adding Text
With AutoVue, you can add a 3D text box entity to a markup.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Text.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click 3D
Text .
2.
The Attach To dialog appears and provides six snapping options:
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
Option
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Description
None
Does not snap to the model.
Vertex
Snaps to a vertex on the model.
Edge
Snaps to an edge on the model.
Face
Snaps to a face on the model.
Mid Edge
Snaps to the middle of an edge on the model.
Ar Center
Snaps to the center point of an arc on the model.
3.
To insert a text box that snaps to a part of the drawing with a leader line,
select one of the snapping modes.
4.
Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box.
301
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
5.
Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The height of the text box will change to accommodate the text.
6.
To change text box font properties, from the Markup menu, select
Format, and then select Font.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective font property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the font type, style, and size.
STEP RESULT: The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type,
style, and size.
7.
Click OK to implement the font changes and to close theFont dialog.
8.
To change the line properties or fill color of the text box, select the text
box, then from the Markup menu, select Format, and then select the
property or properties you want to change.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the respective line property lists on the Markup
Properties toolbar, you can also modify the line style, line thickness, fill types,
and fill colors.
9.
Right-click outside the text area to complete the modification.
STEP RESULT: The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation
Tree.
10.
To move the text box, click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing.
11.
To resize the text box, select it and then click and drag the frame
handles.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To edit the text, double-click the text box in the tree or
in the workspace.
Adding a Note
You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing. A
note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol . Each
note is labelled as Note<n>—where n represents the numerical order of occurrence of the note (for example, the first note is labelled as Note1). To read the
note, double-click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to
display the tooltip.
While editing a Note entity, you can continue to make selections from the
AutoVue toolbar and menubar. Clicking in the workspace saves the last modified
state of the Note and closes the Note dialog.
302
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
3D-SPECIFIC MARKUPS
When creating multiple Note entities, it is possible to group the entities. Once
the Note entities are grouped, clicking on the group opens the last Note created.
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Add Entity, and then select Note.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Note
.
STEP RESULT: The Attach To dialog appears.
2.
In the Attach To dialog, click the entity type that you want to attach the
note to.
3.
Select the entity on the model that you want to attach a note to.
STEP RESULT: The Note dialog appears.
4.
Enter the text that you want in the dialog.
5.
From the File menu, select Information.
STEP RESULT: The Note Information dialog appears.
6.
To change the default font, select Font and the type of font.
7.
Close the Note dialog.
STEP RESULT: The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Navigation Tree.
8.
Right-click outside the note area to complete the modification.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To edit a note, double-click on the note.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model, the
anchor point (the point at which the entity is attached) is highlighted by a
small square. The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible. This
feature allows you to precisely identify the location of the anchor point and
whether the associated entities are visible or hidden.
Nesting Markup Entities
You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other
markup entites.
TASK
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
1.
Add a markup entity to a file (for example, a Box entity).
2.
From the workspace or Markup Tree, select the Box entity.
303
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES
3.
From the Markup menu, select Note or Hyperlink.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Entity toolbar, you can also click
Note
or Hyperlink
.
RESULT:
In the Markup Tree, the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box
(parent) entity.
Working with Markup Entities
With AutoVue, you can assign a markup entity its own color, the same color as
the current active layer, or a custom color. You also have the option of grouping
markup entities. When you group markup entities, you can manage the group
as you would a single entity.
In Markup mode, there are several options for modifying an entity. You can
apply these options to selected pre-existing entities or to new entities that you
add.
You can edit certain markup entities after they have been created. To do
so, in the Markup Navigation Tree, right-click the markup entity and then select
Edit.
NOTE:
Go To a Markup Entity
The Go To feature restores the view state to when an entity was first created.
Opening an existing Markup file also restores the last saved view state.
From the Markup Navigation Tree, right-click the markup entity that you want
to view and select Go To.
Double-clicking on a markup entity from the Markup Navigation tree also
has the same result as the Go To feature.
NOTE:
AutoVue displays the markup page containing the entity.
If you selected a markup entity that is on another page of the Markup file, the
page containing that entity will be displayed.
304
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES
Selecting Markup Entities
To select a markup entity, click the markup entity’s outer edge.
To select multiple entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting. The
markup entity or entities are selected. You can also select the markup entities
from the Markup Navigation Tree. To select multiple entities, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
Moving a Markup Entity
In the Markup Navigation Tree or in the workspace, select the markup entity or
entities that you want to move.
To select multiple entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
In the workspace, click and drag the selected markup entity or entities to
anywhere in the workspace.
Transforming Markup Entities
NOTE:
This menu option is only available for 2D and EDA files.
AutoVue provides the option to rotate markup entities.
Rotating a selected Markup Entity
This feature is only supported for the Text and Stamp markup entities.
TASK
1.
From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree, select the markup
entity to rotate.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: It is not possible to select multiple markup entities to
rotate.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
2.
From the Markup menu, select Object, and then select Rotate.
3.
Rotate the markup entity by clicking and dragging its control points.
Pressing the Shift key while dragging will snap the rotation to 45
degree intervals.
305
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES
Changing Object Order
You can change the order of markup entities in a markup layer. To move an
entity forward or backward, do the following
TASK
1.
Select an entity from the workspace or Markup Entity tree.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Object, then select Order, and then
select one of the following options:
Option
Description
To Back
Moves the markup entity behind all the other entities in the markup layer.
To Front
Moves the markup entity in front of all other entities in the markup layer.
Backward
Moves the markup entity backward by one level.
Forward
Moves the markup entity forward by one level.
Hiding All Markup Entities
To hide all markup entities, do the following:
TASK
1.
From the Markup menu, select Hide Markups.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: A check mark appears next to the Hide Markups
option and the markup entities are hidden on the Markup file.
2.
306
To undo the hide option, from the Markup menu, deselect Hide
Markups.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES
Hiding Markup Files
To hide selected a Markup file, do the following:
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree, right-click the Markup file, then select
Hide.
2.
To undo the hide option, right-click the file name again and select
Show.
Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities
When you group markup entities, you can move, delete, copy and paste, transform, or perform any modification on the group of entities that you would on a
single markup entity.
NOTE:
You can only group markup entities created on the same page.
Grouping Markup Entities
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace, select the
markup entities that you want to group.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: When selecting markup entities in Markup mode,
press Ctrl and drag the box to select all the markup entities within the area.
2.
From the Markupmenu, select Object, and then select Group.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click the selected markup entities
and then select Group.
STEP RESULT: The group of entities appear in the tree under Group.
3.
Perform any modifications.
RESULT: The modifications are applied to all the entities in the group.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
307
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
Ungrouping Markup Entities
TASK
1.
In the Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace, select the group that
you want to ungroup.
2.
From the Markupmenu, select Object, and then select UnGroup.
RESULT: The group of entities appear on the markup as individual entities.
Deleting Markup Entities
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity that you want to delete. To select multiple
markup entities, press the Shift or Control keys while selecting.
2.
From the Markup Properties toolbar, click Delete Markups
.
RESULT:
The selected entity or entities are deleted from the current active file.
You can also press the Delete key to delete the markup entities. Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree, and
select Delete.
NOTE:
Formatting Markup Entity Properties
With AutoVue, you can modify the formatting of a markup entity via the
Format option from the Markup menu, or via the Markup Entity Properties
dialog.
See “Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog”
When creating a markup entity, you have the option to change the line color,
line style, line thickness, arrow style, fill color, and fill type. Additionally, you
can assign the markup entity the same color as the layer.
308
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
Changing Line Color
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
line color.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Line Color.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
Line Color
. Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or
Markup Navigation Tree, select Format,and then select Line Color.
STEP RESULT: The Line Color dialog appears.
3.
From the Line Color list, select the color that you want for the entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Selecting Bylayer
color to the color of the layer.
changes the markup entity
4.
To define a custom line color, from the Line Color list, select Custom
Color .
5.
From the Color dialog that appears, select a color and click OK.
6.
Click OK to close the Line Color dialog.
RESULT:
The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
NOTE:
Any new entities that you create will have the new line color.
Changing Line Style
The current line style is highlighted in the Line Style option.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
line style.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format,and then select Line Style.
Select the new line style from the options provided.
RESULT:
The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
309
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Line Style .
Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree,
select Format, and then select Line Style.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Any new entities that you create will have the new line style.
Changing Line Thickness
The current line thickness is highlighted in the Line Thickness option.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
line thickness.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Line Thickness. Select the new line thickness from the options provided. The line
thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
Line Thickness . Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or
Markup Navigation Tree, select Format,and then select Line Thickness.
3.
To define a custom line thickness, from the Markup menu, select
Format, select Line Thickness, and then select Customize.
STEP RESULT: The Custom Thickness dialog appears.
4.
In the Line Thickness field, enter an integer value in pixels.
5.
Click OK to close the Custom Thickness dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Any new markup entities that you create will have the
new line thickness.
310
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
Changing Arrow Style
AutoVue gives you the option to add an arrow head to certain markup entities.
For example, you can change the arrow style of the line, polyline, arc, freestyle,
and polygon markup entities.
TASK
1.
Select the markup line entity or entities for which you want to change
the arrow style.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Arrow Style.
Select the new arrow style from the options provided.
RESULT:
The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities.
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Arrow Style .
Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree,
select Format, and then select Arrow Style.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Any new entities that you create will have the new arrow style.
Changing Fill Type
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
fill type.
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Fill Type.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
Fill Type
. Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup
Navigation Tree, select Format, and then select Fill Type.
STEP RESULT: The Fill Type dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
311
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
3.
4.
From the Fill Type list, select the fill type that you want for the markup
entity:
•
Select Solid Fill, if you want the fill color to be solid.
•
Select Transparent Fill, if you want the fill color to be transparent.
•
Select No Fill, if you do not want any fill color.
Click OK.
RESULT: The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities. Any new
markup entities that you create will have the new fill type.
Changing Fill Color
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
fill color.
2.
From the Markup menu, selectFormat, and then select Fill Color.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click
Fill Color . Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup
Navigation Tree, select Format, and then select Fill Color.
STEP RESULT: The Fill Color dialog appears.
3.
From the Fill Color list, select the color that you want for the markup
entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Selecting Bylayer
changes the markup entity
color to the color of the layer it is on and selecting Line Color
assigns the
same color as the markup entity’s line.
4.
To define a custom line color, from the Line Color list, select Custom
Color .
5.
From the Color dialog that appears, select a color and click OK.
STEP RESULT: The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
6.
Click OK to close the Fill Color dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Any new markup entities that you create will have the
new fill color.
312
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to assign the
color of the layer that they belong to.
2.
To assign the line color:
•
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Line Color.
The Line Color dialog appears.
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Line Color
. Alternatively, right-click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree, select Format, and then select Line Color.
NOTE:
•
3.
From the Line Color list, select Bylayer
.
To assign the fill color:
From the Markup menu, selectFormat,and then select Fill Color.
•
The Fill Color dialog appears.
NOTE:
From the Markup Properties toolbar, you can also click Fill Color
.
•
4.
From the Fill Color list, select Bylayer
.
Click OK.
RESULT: The selected markup entity or entities change to the color of the layer
that the entity belongs to.
Changing Font
You can change the font of the text box, leader, and measurement entities.
TASK
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
1.
Create the markup entity that you want.
2.
From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree, select the markup
entity for which you want to modify the font then do one of the
following:
•
From Markup menu, select Format, and then select Font. The Font
dialog appears. From the lists select the font, font style, and font size.
You also can select to add a strikeout and underline by selecting their
313
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
check boxes. Click OK to the close the dialog and implement the
changes.
•
From the Markup Entity toolbar, select the font, font size, and font style
(bold, italic, and underline) from their respective lists and buttons. The
font changes are implemented.
Changing Measurement Units and Symbols
You can change the unit of measure and add a symbol to a measurement and
have it appear on the drawing.
TASK
1.
Create the markup measure entity that you want.
2.
Double-click the measurement that you want to change the unit of
measure or add a symbol to.
STEP RESULT: The appropriate Measure dialog appears.
3.
Deselect Display Unit check box if you want to hide the unit on the
drawing. It is selected by default.
4.
From the Units list, select the unit that you want to change the
measurement to.
5.
From the Symbol list, select the symbol that you want to add to the
measurement.
6.
Click OK.
RESULT: The unit of measure changes and the selected symbol is added to the
measurement and appears in the workspace.
Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog
You can use the Markup Entity Properties dialog to modify markup entities.
TASK
1.
314
Select the markup entity you want to modify. To select multiple markup
entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
2.
From the Markup menu, select Format, and then select Markup Entity
Attributes.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can also right-click a markup entity in the Markup
Navigation Tree or the workspace, select Format, and then select Markup
Entity Attributes.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears.
Line Color
Change the line color the selected markup entity or entities.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the
line color.
2.
From the Line Color list, select the color that you want for the entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Selecting Bylayer
color of the layer.
3.
changes the entity color to the
Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
Defining a Custom Line Color
To define a custom line color, take the following steps:
TASK
1.
From the Line Color list, select Custom Color
.
STEP RESULT: The Color dialog appears.
2.
Select a color and click OK.
3.
Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected markup entities prior to specifying a
custom color, only the selected entities will have the new line color. To apply
the new line color to any new markup entity you create, make sure no markup
entity is selected before opening the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT:
The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
315
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
Line Style
Change the line style for a selected markup entity or entities.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity you want to change the line style. To select
multiple markup entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
2.
From the Line Style list, select the required line style.
3.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Any new markup entities that you create will have the
new line style.
RESULT:
The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
Line Thickness
Change the line thickness for a selected markup entity or entities.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity for which you want to change the line thickness. To select multiple markup entities, press the Shift or Control key
while selecting.
2.
From the Line Thickness list, select the required line thickness.
STEP RESULT: The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
Defining a Custom Line Thickness
To define a custom line thickness, take the following steps:
TASK
1.
From the Line Thickness list, select Customize.
2.
In the Width (Pixels) field, enter the desired width.
3.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT:
The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
316
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
NOTE:
Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness.
Width (Pixels)
Customize the line thickness when Customize is selected in the Line Thickness
list. When other line thicknesses are selected, this field displays its value in pixels
but cannot be edited.
Arrow Style
Add an arrow head at one or both ends of a markup line entity.
TASK
1.
Select the markup line entity you want to change the arrow style. To
select multiple markup line entities, press the Shift or Control key
while selecting.
2.
From the Arrow Style list, select the style of arrow that you want for the
markup line entity.
3.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT:
The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities.
NOTE:
Any new markup line entities that you create will have the new arrow
style.
Fill Type
Change the transparency for selected markup entity or entities.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Select the markup entity you want to change the fill type. To select
multiple markup entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
317
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
2.
3.
From the Fill Type list, select the fill type that you want for the markup
entity:
•
Select Solid Fill, if you want the fill color to be solid.
•
Select Transparent Fill, if you want the fill color to be transparent.
•
Select No Fill, if you do not want any fill color.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT:
The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
NOTE:
Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type.
Fill Color
Change the line color, fill color, and fill type for a selected markup entity or entities.
TASK
1.
Select the markup entity you want to change the fill color. To select
multiple markup entities, press the Shift or Control key while selecting.
2.
From the Fill Color list, select the color that you want for the markup
entity.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Selecting Bylayer
color to the color of the layer.
changes the markup entity
Defining a Custom Color
To define your own color, take the following steps:
TASK
1.
From the Fill Color list, select Custom Color
.
STEP RESULT: The Color dialog appears.
2.
Select a color and click OK.
STEP RESULT: The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
3.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT:
The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities.
318
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
NOTE:
Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color.
Markup Layers
You can move selected markup entities to a specific layer—the markup entities
will inherit the properties of the layer.
TASK
1.
From the Markup Layer list, select the layer you want to make active.
2.
Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog.
RESULT: The selected layer appears in the workspace.
See “Setting the Active Markup Layer”
Leader Alignment
With the Leader markup entity, you can adjust the location of the leader line’s
anchor point to the text box. The Leader Alignment list has the following option
for anchor point location with respect to the text box: Top Left, Top Center, Top
Right, Center Left, Center, Center Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center, and
Bottom Right.
Text Box Visibility
You can choose to hide the surrounding box for the Leader, Text, and 3D Text
markup entities.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
319
MARKUPS
FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES
320
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
10
Printing
With AutoVue, you can print and preview files. Files can be printed on their
own or with associated markups and overlays. You can also choose which
markup layers to make visible so that they can print.
With the Batch Print option, you can send a list of files to print at the same time.
When printing a file, there are print properties that you can define. From the
File menu, select Print to display the following properties:
Option
Description
Print
Define the print options.
See “Print Options”
Margins
Define the margin settings.
See “Print Margins”
Headers/Footers
Define the headers/footers to be included on every page printed.
See “Header/Footer”
Watermark
Define the watermark to be included on every page printed.
See “Watermarks”
Pen Settings
Change the thickness assigned to a pen.
See “Assigning Pen Settings”
Print Options
With the Options tab, you can define print options for the printed file. The
options are:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
321
PRINTING
PRINT OPTIONS
Print Dialog Section
Printer
Scaling
Alignment/Offset
Option
Description
Modify
Select a printer and configure print properties,
such as paper size, number of copies, and so on.
Paper size
Displays selected paper size. This option also
allows you to modify the paper size.
Orientation
Portrait - Specify if file should be printed
portrait.
Landscape - Specify if the file should be printed
landscape.
Auto - Specify if orientations should be printed
as saved in the file.
Units
From the drop-down list, set the unit for Scaling
and Alignment/Offset. The available units are
pixels, inches and millimeters.
Fit to Page
Scales the image to fit on the output page.
Factor
Specifies the number of drawing units per
specified number of inches.
Scale
Scales the image according to a percentage. You
can select a predefined scaling factor or
manually enter a custom scaling factor.
Decimal places are accepted.
Specify where the drawing will appear on the
printout.
You can define custom alignment in inches by
entering a X and Y value.
NOTE: This feature is disabled for spreadsheet
formats.
Document Pages
322
Specify the document pages to print: All,
Current or Range.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
PRINT OPTIONS
Print Dialog Section
Option
Page Area
Description
Select the page area to print.
Extents
Print the extent of the document.
Displayed
Print the area displayed in the View window.
Option is always enabled.
Limits
Prints the file limits instead of extents.
Option is disabled when Current is selected for
Document Pages.
NOTE: This option is only available for AutoCAD
drawings that have the limits defined.
Selected
This option is grayed out by default. To enable,
click Select and then select a print range. The
Selected option is now enabled.
Native settings (from
file)
This option only applies to Excel files. When
selected, AutoVue uses Excel’s print settings that
are saved in the excel document. The following
print settings are supported: Page Orientation,
Scaling, Paper Size, Print Areas, Page Breaks,
Row and Column headers, Grid lines,
Left/Right/Top/Bottom margins.
Force to Black
Force all colors to grayscale.
Output a single page
Limits output to a single page when the scaling
options selected causes a single page to span
over several pages.
NOTE: This option is only enabled when Scale of
Factor is selected in the Scaling section.
Skip Blank Pages
This option omits blank pages when printing.
Print Notes
When in Markup mode, select this option to
print the Note markups of the current file.
NOTE: This option is only available when in
Markup mode.
Print One Note Per
Page
When in Markup mode, select this option to
print one Note markup per page of the current
file.
NOTE: This option is only available when in
Markup mode.
Print Row Headers
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Select this option to print row headers.
Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and
archive files.
323
PRINTING
CONFIGURING THE PRINT OPTIONS
Print Dialog Section
Option
Description
Print Column Headers
Select this option to print column headers.
Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and
archive files.
Partial Preview
Display a view of the printer page, highlighting
the printable area.
Configuring the Print Options
TASK
1.
From the Filemenu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Options tab.
3.
Configure the print options.
4.
Configure other print options.
5.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Print Preview dialog appears.
6.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Print Margins
From the Margins tab of the Print Properties dialog, you can define the top,
bottom, right and left margins for the printed file. You can define:
324
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
PRINT MARGINS
Option
Description
Margins
Set the value for the Left, Top, Right, and Bottom margins.
Minimum
Set the acceptable minimum margins for the selected printer.
Units
Specify the unit for the margins.
Override
Printing
Minimum
Margins
Select this option to override the predefined minimum print margins.
Setting the Margins
TASK
1.
From the Filemenu, selectPrint.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Margins tab.
3.
Enter the margin size that you want for Left, Top, Right, and Bottom
or click Minimum if you want to set the margins to the minimum
acceptable for the selected printer.
4.
To define margins that are less the minimum acceptable for the
selected printer, select Override Printing Minimum Margins.
5.
From the Units list, select the unit to which you want to set the margins.
6.
Configure other print options.
7.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Print Previewdialog appears.
8.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
325
PRINTING
HEADER/FOOTER
Header/Footer
From the Headers/Footers tab of the Print Properties dialog, you can define the
headers and footers that you want to print on every page of the document. You
can enter the text manually or choose from a list of Insert Codes.
The list of insert codes are:
•
%f: Full path of document
•
%v: Document Drive
•
%d: Document Directory
•
%b: Document Base name
•
%e: Document file extension
•
%n: Total document pages
•
%p: Current page number
•
%N: Total tiled-pages
•
%P: Current tile number
•
%Y: Date: Year
•
%M: Date: Month
•
%D: Date: Day
•
%W: Date: Day of week
•
%H: Time: Hour
•
%U: Time: Minute
•
%S: Time: Seconds
•
%r: New line
•
%F: Native Print Settings (Excel)
NOTE:
A literal percentage mark is entered manually as %%.
You can also print system variables in headers and footers. Select a variable from
the Insert Variable list. Some Insert Variable options are: user.name, browser
and java.home.
326
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
HEADER/FOOTER
Adding a Header and Footer
In the Headers/Footers tab, you can manually enter text or choose from a list of
Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers. You can also print system
variables.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Headers/Footers tab.
3.
Click in the Left, Center or Right field and enter the text that you want
to appear in the header and footer, or choose an Insert Code or Insert
Variable.
4.
To Insert Codein the header or footer, click Left, Center or Right, then
select a code from the list.
5.
To Insert Variablein the header or footer, click Left, Center or Right,
then select a variable from the list.
6.
To change the Font, click Set Font. The Font dialog appears.
7.
From the Font list, select the type of font.
8.
From the Size list, select the size of font.
9.
To set the font Style, click Bold or Italic or both, then click OK.
10.
In the Print Properties dialog, configure other print properties.
11.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Preview dialog appears.
12.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Native Print Settings
You can choose to include predefined headers and footers when printing an
Excel file from AutoVue.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Print Properties dialog, click the Headers/Footers tab.
327
PRINTING
WATERMARKS
2.
Under Headers and Footers, click inside the Left, Center, and Right
boxes corresponding to the header or footer position in the original file.
3.
Select %F: Native Print Settings (Excel) from the Insert Code list.
4.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Excel file’s headers and footers are printed.
Watermarks
From the Watermark tab of the Print Properties dialog, you can specify a watermark that will appear on a printed file. When printing a watermark, it appears
transparent on the file contents. You can choose a diagonal, horizontal or
vertical orientation for the watermark.
In addition to entering text, you can:
•
set the type, size and style of font
•
insert Watermark information
•
print system variables
To insert Watermark information, AutoVue provides a list of codes that you
can choose from. These codes are:
328
•
%f: Full path of document
•
%v: Document Drive
•
%d: Document Directory
•
%b: Document Base name
•
%e: Document file extension
•
%n: Total document pages
•
%p: Current page number
•
%N: Total tiled-pages
•
%P: Current tile number
•
%Y: Date: Year
•
%M: Date: Month
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
WATERMARKS
•
%D: Date: Day
•
%W: Date: Day of week
•
%H: Time: Hour
•
%U: Time: Minute
•
%S: Time: seconds
•
%r: New line
NOTE:
A literal percentage mark is entered manually as %%.
You can also print system variables in watermarks. Select a variable from the
Insert Variable list. Some Insert Variable options are: user.name, browser and
java.home.
Adding a Watermark
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Watermark tab.
3.
Enter the Watermark Text that you want to appear on the file.
4.
To insert a code in the watermark, select a code from the Insert Code
list.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For example, if you select %n: Total document
pages, the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the Watermark. You can insert more than one code.
5.
To insert a system variable, select a variable from the Insert Variable list.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: For example, if you select browser.version, the
version of the browser that the file is displayed in will appear in the Watermark.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can insert more than one system variable.
6.
To set the orientation of the watermark, click Diagonal, Horizontal or
Vertical.
7.
To change the Font, click Set Font.The Font dialog appears.
8.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
a
From the Font list, select the type of font.
b
From the Size list, select the size of font.
In the Print Properties dialog, configure other print properties.
329
PRINTING
ASSIGNING PEN SETTINGS
9.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Preview dialog appears.
10.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Assigning Pen Settings
From the Pen Settings tab of the Print Properties dialog, you can set the thickness of the color indices for the print file.
AutoVue uses the default pen color indices of the native document for the
vector file being viewed. You will not be able to change the color assigned to a pen
with AutoVue.
NOTE:
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
2.
Click the Pen Settings tab.
3.
Under From/To, select the Color Index that you want to assign a new
pen thickness.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To change more than one color indices, press the
Shift or Control key while selecting.
4.
From the Units list, select the unit of measure that you want to set the
thickness.
5.
Enter the new thickness.
STEP RESULT: The new Thickness appears beside the Color Index.
6.
In the Print Properties dialog, configure other print properties
7.
Configure other print options.
8.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Print Preview dialog appears.
330
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
PARTIAL PREVIEW OF A FILE
9.
Click OK to print.
STEP RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Creating a New Pen Setting
TASK
1.
Set the thickness for the color indices that you want.
2.
Click Save As. The Save As dialog appears.
3.
Enter a file name with a .c2t extension, then click OK.
STEP RESULT: The new pen setting appears in the Current Pen Settings list.
4.
In the Print Properties dialog, click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Deleting a Pen Setting
TASK
1.
Select the pen setting that you want to delete from the Current Pen
Settings.
2.
Click Delete.
STEP RESULT: The pen setting disappears from the list.
3.
Click Cancel to close the Print Properties dialog.
Partial Preview of a File
The Partial Print Preview dialog displays the printable area on top of the page
area so that users can have a clear idea of what will be printed.
NOTE:
Option is only enabled when Current is selected from Document Pages.
TASK
1.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Configure the print properties.
331
PRINTING
PREVIEWING A FILE BEFORE PRINTING
2.
Click Partial Preview in the Print Properties dialog.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Print Preview dialog appears and highlights the area
that will be printed. The Paper size, Printable Area, and Drawing Area are
displayed.
3.
Click OK to close the Partial Print Preview dialog.
Previewing a File Before Printing
You can preview a print copy of the current active file on screen according to
your printer’s capabilities and the print property settings.
TASK
1.
View the file in AutoVue.
2.
From the File menu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
3.
Configure the print properties.
4.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can print the file from the Print Preview window
by clicking Print. You can also zoom in and out of a file, as well as navigate
from one page to another of a multi-page file.
STEP RESULT: The file appears in Print Preview Mode in the Print Preview
window.
5.
332
Click Close to close the Print Preview window.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
PRINTING
PRINTING A FILE
Printing a File
You can print original files along with their Markup files and selected markup
layers together so that they appear as one file.
TASK
1.
Open the file you want to print.
2.
To print the associated markups, open the Markup file or files you want
to print.
3.
If you are printing Markup files and you want to print the visible layers,
from the Markup menu, select Markup Layers.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Layers dialog appears.
4.
Select the markup layers you want visible.
5.
Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog.
6.
From the File menu, select Print.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the AutoVue toolbar, you can also click Print
.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
7.
Configure the print properties.
8.
To view a partial view of the file, click Partial Preview.
STEP RESULT: The Partial Print Preview dialog appears.
9.
Click OK to print.
RESULT: The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing.
Batch Printing
With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time.
You can also generate a batch by simultaneously opening all the files included
in the batch print.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Batch Print.
STEP RESULT: The Batch Print dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
333
PRINTING
BATCH PRINTING
2.
To add a file to be printed, click Add.
STEP RESULT: The Open dialog appears.
3.
Enter the file name or browse to locate the file or files that you want to
add, then click Open.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To add more files to the list, repeat steps 2 to 3. To
remove a file(s), select the file from the List of files to be printed and click
Remove.
STEP RESULT: The files appear in the List of files to be printed.
4.
Click Print in the Batch Print dialog.
STEP RESULT: The Print Properties dialog appears.
5.
Configure the print properties.
6.
Click OK to print.
STEP RESULT: The Print Progress dialog appears. It displays document name,
number of pages and printing status (OK, Canceled or Printing). When the
print job completes, the dialog remains open and displays the print status of
each job.
7.
To cancel a print job, select a check box to the left of the file and click
Cancel Job(s).
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Clicking the dialog close icon minimizes the Batch
Pring dialog to the lower left corner of the AutoVue status bar. To restore the
Batch Print dialog, click the Batch Print icon on the AutoVue status bar.
334
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
11
Conversion
Sometimes you need to convert a file to be able to use it with an application it
was not created from. AutoVue provides several conversion file formats for you.
Conversion Options
From the File menu, select Convert to open the Convert dialog. Depending on
the conversion type being performed, the available options in the Convert
dialog may vary. These options are:
Option
Description
Color Depth
Select an option from the list:
1 = Black and white
4 = 16 colors
8 = 256 colors
24 = True color
auto = AutoVue selects the color depth that best matches the
original file.
Convert to Format
A list of all the possible types of output file formats currently
available for conversion. The available formats are:
PDF
TIFF
Windows Bitmap
NOTE: Conversion to PDF is not supported when the AutoVue
server is running on Linux platforms.
Output
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Specify the name and path of the file in which the conversion
is to be stored. This file is also known as the output file. You
can use Browse to provide AutoVue with the file’s path.
If writing onto an existing file, a warning message appears,
asking if you want to overwrite the existing file.
335
CONVERSION
PDF
Option
Description
Sub-Format
The Sub-Formatlist appears when you select HP Laserjet
Print or TIFF from the Convert to Format list. Select a
sub-format from the list.
Convert Region
The area of the file to be converted. The available options
are:
Display - The area displayed in the workspace. For example,
if you zoomed in on a particular region of the file, the
zoomed portion of the file is converted.
Extent - Refers to the entire extents of the file.
Selected - The selected entity is converted.
Convert Pages
The pages to be converted. The available options are:
All - convert all pages
Current - convert the current page
Range - convert the pages indicated in the range
Size
You can set the size and units (pixels, inches and
millimeters) of the output file.
With raster files the units are preset as pixels:
X indicates the number of horizontal pixels
Y is the number of vertical pixels for the current active file
contents.
At times, AutoVue will preset X and Y to match the
specifications of the selected conversion file format. Other
times, X and Y will be available and may be changed
according to your preferences. Your selection here will not
affect the current display but will affect the conversion file’s
resolution.
Scale
Set the scale percentage of the converted page.
DPI
You may set the dots per inch (DPI) for the converted page.
PDF
With AutoVue it is possible to convert Office, 2D and EDA formats to PDF.
When converted from Markup Mode, markups are added to the contents of the
base PDF file. When you open the PDF, you will see the base file along with all
markups.
336
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONVERSION
X AND Y
X and Y
Three factors affect the resolution of an image: the type of image you are scanning, the output device and the acceptable file size. High-resolution scans often
require large files, causing longer processing and print time. Note that a
high-resolution may not produce a better-quality printed image if your output
device does not recognize the higher resolution information stored in the file.
To keep file sizes manageable, select the lowest resolution that provides acceptable quality on your output device.
With some file types, the Size option appears giving you a choice between millimeters and inches. Page sizes can be selected from the Size list or you can
customize page sizes by configuring the Initialization file. For more information, refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide.
Technical Drawing Page Sizes
ISO Paper Format
A8.5” X 11.0” (216 mm X 279 mm)
A4 285 mm X 198 mm
B11.0” X 17.0” (279 mm X 432 mm)
A3 396 mm X 273 mm
C17.0” X 22.0” (432 mm X 559 mm)
A2 570 mm X 396 mm
D22.0” X 34.0” (559 mm X 864 mm)
A1 817 mm X 570 mm
E34.0” X 44.0” (864 mm X 1118 mm)
A0 1165 mm X 817 mm
Converting a File
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Convert.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Input area varies according to the type of file. For
example, a word-processing file displays the file and format, a raster file
displays the file path/name, format and size, and vector and database files
display the size, file type and dimensions.
STEP RESULT: The Convert dialog appears.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
337
CONVERSION
CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS
2.
In the Save As field, enter the path and filename or click Browse to
locate the directory where you want to save the converted file.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If writing on to an existing file, the contents of the
output file will be overwritten.
3.
Specify the conversion options.
4.
Click OK. The file is converted and appears in the specified directory.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can convert several selected pages of a
multi-page file to a multi-page TIFF.
Changing the Pen Settings
With AutoVue, you can specify a thickness for each pen color when doing a
conversion. This option only applies to vector files.
TASK
1.
From the File menu, select Convert.
STEP RESULT: The Convert dialog appears.
2.
Click Pens.
STEP RESULT: The pen Thickness dialog appears.
3.
In the From/To section of the Pen Thickness dialog, select the Color
Index for which you want to modify the thickness.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one Color Index, press the Shift or
Control keys while selecting.
4.
From the Units list, select the unit in which you want to set the thickness.
5.
In the Thickness field, enter a thickness value.
6.
Press the Enter key.
STEP RESULT: The new thickness value appears beside the selected Color Index
in the From/To section of the Pen Thickness dialog.
7.
To save the changes that you made, click Save As.
STEP RESULT: The Save As dialog appears.
8.
338
Enter a file name for the new pen settings.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
CONVERSION
CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS
9.
Click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To modify an existing pen setting, select the pen
setting from the Current Pen Settings list, make the changes, then click Save.
STEP RESULT: The new pen settings are saved and appear in the Current Pen
Settings list.
10.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Click OK to close the Pen Thickness dialog.
339
CONVERSION
CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS
340
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
12
Real-Time
Collaboration
NOTE:
This feature is only available for Client/Server deployments.
The real-time collaborationoption enables multiple users to review files interactively and simultaneously, thereby shortening the review process for documents.
Participants in a Collaboration Session assume different roles. Each Collaboration Session has a Host, a Controller and one or more users. These participants
have varying privileges during the Collaboration Session.
Collaboration User Tree
When you are in a Collaboration Session, the panel on the left displays the Users
tab, in addition to the tabs displayed when you are normally viewing a file. The
Users tab displays the Username, the Layer Color representing the user, the In
Session value and the user Status.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
341
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
THE HOST
The Host
The person who initiates the Collaboration Session is the Host by default. The
Host is also automatically the Controller of the Collaboration Session. The Host
can assign another user to be the Host by selecting Assign Host from the
Collaborate menu.
When initiating a Collaboration Session, the Host can specify the Markup to
open; the host can also open a Markup file while a session is in progress. The
Host can invite other users to join the Collaboration Session during the session
or at initiation of the session.
The Host can also save the collaboration markup, called the Session Markup.
The host is the only one who can save the Session Markup.
The Controller
The Controller is the person who controls the base file's view during the Collaboration Session. Other participants in the Collaboration Session can choose
between displaying or hiding the Controller's View changes.
When a session is initiated, the Host is also the Controller. The Controller can
change the base file anytime during the Collaboration Session. However, when
the Controller is not the the Host, opening a new file has to be approved by the
Host.
At any time during a session, a participant who is not an Observer can request
control of a Collaboration Session.
Lock
Any user who is not the Controller of the Collaboration Session can choose to
display the Controller's View modifications on the base file and the other participants' modifications on the Markup file made during the Collaboration
Session. To do so, from the Collaborate menu, select Lock View to Presenter,
or from the Collaborate status bar, click Lock View to Presenter .
342
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
OBSERVER
When you lock your view, the file displayed will have the same Configuration
options that the Controller set in the Configure menu.
NOTE:
For all users, except for the Controller, view options are disabled.
To unlock your view from the presenter’s, from the Collaborate menu, again
select Lock View to Presenter, or from the Collaborate status bar, click Unlock
View to Presenter .
Observer
Observers can take part in a Collaboration Session but cannot create Markup
entities. They can observe and make comments in the Chat window. The Host
can designate a user as an Observer when the Host invites the user to the Collaboration session. A user can also decide to take part as an Observer in the Collaboration Session by selecting Observer in the Join Session dialog. There can be
more than one Observer during a Collaboration Session.
Opening a File
The Controller is the only user who can open a file during a Collaboration
Session.
To open a URL, from the File menu, select Open URL.
To open a local file, from the File menu, select Open Local File.
The File Open dialog appears, letting you specify the file to open.
When AutoVue is integrated with a Document Management System (DMS),
clicking Open URL opens a dialog that lets you view a DMS file. You can work
on this file opened through Open URL during the Collaboration Session. When
the Host is the same as the Controller and the Host opens a URL, the host is
prompted to save the Session Markup. When the Controller opens a URL, the
Host is prompted to save the Session Markup.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
343
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
POINTER
Pointer
The Pointer is the cross-hair marker the Controller uses to point to a specific
place in the file.
Session Information
The Session Information option is available from the Collaborate menu
during a Collaboration Session. It displays the Session Subject (the name
assigned to the Collaboration Session), the Session ID, the name of the base file
viewed, the Host and the list of users participating.
Session Markup
This is the Markup file created during the Collaboration Session. All participants can add Markup entities to the Session Markup file.
Only the Host can save the Session Markup. Save and Save As are disabled
for all other users.
NOTE:
Show Presenter Window
The Show Presenter Window option in the Collaborate menu is available to
any user whose view is set to unlocked. When you select Show Presenter
Window from the Collaborate menu, the Presenter Window appears
displaying a bird's eye view of the base file viewed and the Markup changes done
during the Collaboration Session.
When you use Show Presenter Window, you can simultaneously track the
Controller's base file view changes and everyone's markup changes in the
Presenter Window while your main window display remains unaffected by
344
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
anyone’s modifications. It is like having a locked view and an unlocked view on
hand at the same time.
Collaboration Session
The Collaborate menu provides you with a means to initiate a Collaboration
Session or join an existing session. When you initiate a Collaboration Session, a
session object is created on the server and you are the Host and Controller of the
session. The Host owns the Session Markup and is the only one who can save it
and open an existing Markup. The Host can also invite other users during a
session.
Initiating a Collaboration Session
When you initiate a Collaboration Session, a session object is created on the
server and is maintained for the duration of the Collaboration Session. When
you initiate a session, you become the Host and the Controller of the session.
TASK
1.
Open the file that you want to collaborate on.
2.
From the Collaborate menu, select Start Collaboration Session.
STEP RESULT: The Initiate Session dialog appears.
3.
In the Session Subject field, enter a session name.
4.
If you want to open a Markup for the Collaboration Session, click
Browse and browse and select the markup you want to open.
5.
Select Public if you want the Collaboration Session visible to others
who may want to join the session.
6.
Select Private if you want the Collaboration Session only visible to the
participants.
7.
If you want to set a password for the Collaboration Session, enter a
Password, then enter it again to Confirm.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: If you selected Private and chose not to set password,
when you click OK, a confirmation dialog appears asking if you are sure you
do not want to set a password.
8.
From the Users list, select the users that you want to invite.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Users list shows all users connected to the
AutoVue server
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
345
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
9.
Click Add.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To remove a user, select the user from the Invited list
and click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The user you selected appears in the Invited list.
10.
To designate a user as an Observer, select the check box under Invited.
11.
Click OK.
RESULT: AutoVue goes into Collaboration mode and the session is started. The
user or users that are invited receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been
invited to join the session. The notification message indicates the Session Name,
File and Initiator.
Changing a User’s Layer Color of a Session
TASK
1.
In the Initiate Session dialog, click Layer Color.
STEP RESULT: The Layer Color dialog appears.
2.
Select a Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want
the user to choose their own color.
3.
Click OK.
STEP RESULT: In the Initiate Session dialog, the selected layers color appears
beside the Username in the Invited list.
RESULT:
If you selected Let user choose, a custom color icon appears beside the Username, indicating that the color can be changed By User.
Adding New Users to a Session
You can also invite users that are not currently online using the Add New
button on the Initiate Session dialog.
TASK
1.
In the Initiate Session dialog, click Add New.
STEP RESULT: The Add User dialog appears.
2.
346
Enter Username.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
3.
Select Observer if you want to designate the user as an Observer.
4.
Select a Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want
the user to choose their own color.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT:
The new user is added to the Invited list in the Initiate Session dialog.
NOTE:
To add more than one user, repeat steps 1 to 5.
Opening a Markup While Initiating a Session
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Start Collaboration Session.
STEP RESULT: The Initiate Session dialog appears.
2.
Click Browse.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
3.
In the Select Markup File(s) list, select the check box beside the Markup
that you want to open.
4.
To import a Markup file, click Import.
STEP RESULT: The Select markup file to import dialog appears.
5.
Locate the file that you want to open.
6.
Click Open.
7.
Click OK in the Markup Files dialog.
8.
In the Initiate Session dialog, select Session Markup if you want to
open a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities
from the Collaboration Session.
9.
Click OK.
RESULT: The selectedMarkup appears in the Initiate Session dialog.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
347
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
Opening a Markup During a Session
The Host can open Markups during a Collaboration Session. These Markups
can be session markups created during Collaboration Sessions or any
non-session Markup files.
TASK
1.
During a Collaboration Session, from the Markup menu, select Open.
STEP RESULT: A confirmation dialog appears, prompting you to save the current
Session Markup.
2.
Click Yes or No or Cancel.
STEP RESULT: The Markup Files dialog appears.
3.
Select the check box beside the Markup that you want to open.
4.
To import a Markup file, click Import.
STEP RESULT: The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears.
5.
Locate the file that you want to open.
6.
Click Open.
7.
In the Markup Files dialog, select Session Markup if you want to open
a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities from
the Collaboration Session.
8.
Click OK.
RESULT: The selected Markup appears in the Collaboration window.
Joining a Session
You can either join a collaboration session that you are invited to or to a session
for which you have been provided the session ID and password. When you are
invited to a collaboration session, you get a tooltip notification. If you do not
want to receive any notifications when you are invited to a Collaboration
Sessions, select Do Not Disturb from the Collaboratemenu.
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Join Collaboration Session.
STEP RESULT: The Join Session dialog appears.
348
2.
From the Session ID list, select the active session you want to join.
3.
Enter the Password if the Host has set one.
4.
If you just want to be an Observer, select the check box.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
5.
If you want to select a layer color, click Layer Color, select a color from
the list in the Layer Color dialog and click OK.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Layer Color is disabled if the Host did not select
Let user choose when initiating the Collaboration Session or when you are
invited to join the session.
STEP RESULT: The Layer Color dialog appears.
6.
Click OK in the Join Session dialog.
RESULT: You have joined the session.
Inviting Users During a Session
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Invite.
STEP RESULT: The Invite dialog appears.
2.
From the Online list, select the user or users that you want to invite.
3.
Click Add.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: You can add users that are going to join the session at
a later time by clicking Add New and entering the Username.
STEP RESULT: The user or users you selected appears in the Invited list.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT: The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been invited to
join the session.
Removing Users from a Session
When initiating a Collaboration Session, if you added a user by mistake and
would like to remove a user that has been added to the Invited list, you can do
so. You cannot remove Invited users once the Collaboration Session is in progress.
TASK
1.
In the Invite dialog, locate the Invited list.
STEP RESULT: The Invite dialog appears.
2.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
From the Invited list, select the user or users that you want to remove.
349
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
3.
Click Remove.
STEP RESULT: The user or users you selected appear in the Online list.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT: The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she is no longer invited
to the session.
Assigning a Host During a Session
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Assign Host.
STEP RESULT: The Assign Host dialog appears.
2.
From the Users list, select the user that you want to assign as host.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT: The user you selected is now the host of the Collaboration Session.
Passing Control of a Session to Another User
When you initiate a Collaboration Session, you are the default Controller of the
session until you relinquish control to another user. You may grant control to
another user any time during the session. Once you grant control to another
user, all other users will automatically lock their views to the new Controller.
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Pass Control.
STEP RESULT: The Grant Control dialog appears.
2.
From the Users list, select the user that you want to grant control to.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT: The user you selected has control of the Collaboration Session.
350
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
Saving a Session Markup
The Host owns the Session Markup and is the only one who can save it.
TASK
1.
At the end of the Collaboration Session, from the Markup menu, select
Save As.
STEP RESULT: The Save Markup File As dialog appears.
2.
Enter the Markup ID.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The Markup Information is optional.
3.
Click OK to save.
RESULT: The session Markup is saved and appears as a markup note entity with
the control history and chat transcript.
Closing a Session
Only a Host can close a Collaboration Session.
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Close Collaboration Session.
STEP RESULT: The Save Markup dialog appears prompting you to save the
Session Markup.
2.
Click Yes.
RESULT: All users are notified that the Collaboration Session is closed.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
351
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
Requesting Control of a Session
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Request Control.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Collaboration status bar, you can also click
Request Control .
STEP RESULT: The Controller receives a message that you have requested
control.
2.
The Controller clicks OK.
RESULT:
You become the Controller of the Collaboration Session.
NOTE: If the Controller does not respond within 10 seconds, control is automatically granted to the user who requested it.
Tracking Changes
The Show Presenter Window option allows you to simultaneously track the
Controller’s base file view changes and everyone’s markup changes while your
markup file remains unchanged.
You must be in an unlocked view state before selecting Show Presenter
Window.
From the Collaborate menu, select Show Presenter Window.
You can now track changes without affecting your view.
Unlocking a View
If you do not want to see the Controller’s view changes, clear the Lock View.
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu click Lock View to Presenter.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Collaborate status bar, you can also click
Unlock View
.
STEP RESULT: The Lock View to Presenter option is deselected.
2.
352
From the Collaborate menu, select Show Presenter Window if you
want to simultaneously track the Controller’s base file view changes
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
COLLABORATION SESSION
and everyone’s markup changes while your markup file remains
unchanged.
RESULT:
You can now track changes without affecting your view.
The Show Presenter Window option is only available when the view is
unlocked.
NOTE:
Locking a View
The Lock View to Presenter option allows you view changes the Controller is
making. When you select the Lock View to Presenter option, you are also propagating your markup modifications to the other participants in the session.
Lock View to Presenter is the default for all participants in a session.
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Lock View to Presenter
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Collaborate status bar, you can also click
Lock View to Presenter
.
RESULT: The Lock View to Presenteroption is highlighted.
Viewing Session Information
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Session Information.
STEP RESULT: The Session Information dialog appears displaying the Session
Subject, Session ID, File Name, Host, and Users of the session.
2.
Click Close.
Leaving a Session
Only a Host can close a Collaboration Session. All other participants can leave
a Collaboration Session and rejoin at a later time if it is still in session.
From the Collaborate menu, select Leave Collaboration Session.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
353
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
CHAT WINDOW
The other participants are notified that you left the Collaboration Session and
AutoVue returns to View mode.
Chat Window
The Chat Window, is a tool you can use to communicate with other users. You
send each other messages via the Chat Window. The Chat Window is also useful
in giving you Collaboration Session updates such as which users are present and
which users have joined or left the session.
At the end of the Collaboration Session, a transcript of the Chat Window is
saved as a Note entity along with the Markup as the Collaboration Session
Markup file. The Note entity contains session information such who the Host
was, who was invited and session time and duration.
The Chat Window contains these menu options:
Menu
File
Edit
Options
354
Option
Description
Send Message
Sends text messages to other users.
Print
Prints the contents of the Chat window.
Quit
Closes the Chat window.
Copy
Copy text from the Chat window.
Clear
Clears all the text in the Chat window.
Find Text
Searches for text in the Chat window.
Select All
Selects the entire text in the Chat window.
Users
Displays the users in the Collaboration Session.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
CHAT WINDOW
Sending a Message to Selected Users
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Show Chat Window.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Collaborate status bar, you can also click
Show Chat Window
.
STEP RESULT: The Chat dialog appears.
2.
Select Selected users.
STEP RESULT: A list of Users appear in the Chat dialog.
3.
Under Users, select the user or users that you want to send the
message to.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: To select more than one user, press the Shift or
Control key while selecting.
4.
In the Send Message to field, enter your message.
5.
Click Send.
RESULT: The private message is sent to the selected users of the Collaboration
Session.
Sending a Message to All Users
TASK
1.
From the Collaborate menu, select Show Chat Window.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: From the Collaborate status bar, you can also click
Show Chat Window
.
STEP RESULT: The Chat dialog appears.
2.
Select All Users.
3.
In the Send Message to field, enter your message.
4.
Click Send.
RESULT: The message is sent to all users in the Collaboration Session.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
355
REAL-TIME COLLABORATION
CHAT WINDOW
356
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
13
Appendix A: EDA Terms
and Definitions
The following table presents commonly used EDA terms and their corresponding definitions.
EDA Term
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Definition
Annular ring
A circular strip of conductive material that
remains after a hole has been drilled
through the pad of a printed circuit board.
Anti-copper
An area within a fill zone in which copper
cannot be placed.
Aperture
An opening, similar to the aperture of a
camera, that is used for photo-plotting.
Apertures are available in various sizes and
shapes.
Aperture list
A text file containing the dimensions for
each of the apertures used to photo-plot
PCB artwork.
Clusters
Components that are grouped according to
their interrelationships and placed in close
proximity on the board. This keeps the
connections on the PCB short so that the
board is easier to work with.
Component
An element or a part of a PCB.
Component density
The quantity of components on a unit area
of a PCB.
Component hole
A hole in the printed circuit board that
corresponds to a pin or wire of a
component. This hole serves the dual
function of attaching the component to the
board and establishing the electrical
connection between the pin or wire and the
remainder of the board circuitry.
357
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
358
Definition
Component library
A computer data file that contains the
footprint patterns for a number of
components.
Component side
The uppermost or top layer of a board on
which most components are placed.
Component silkscreen
The silkscreen markings of the printed
circuit board that appear on the component
side. The silkscreen is applied over the
solder mask.
Component solder mask
The colored, usually translucent, coating
applied to the board over the etched copper.
It protects the selected areas from the
soldering process.
Connection
An unrouted, partially routed, or completely
routed path between two pads. In a net with
n pads, there are exactly n–1 connections.
Copper pour
A method by which a copper zone is filled
with a specified pattern, with objects that
cross the zone or lie within the zone being
avoided.
Copper zone
An area on a board designed to be covered
by a layer of copper when manufactured.
Also known as a "metal zone".
Cross hatching
The breaking up of large conductive areas by
the use of a pattern of lines and spaces in the
conductive material.
Datum
A specific location (a point) that serves as a
reference to locate a PCB pattern or layer for
manufacture.
Density
On a PCB, the degree to which components
are packed on the board. Generally, the
density is given as the number of square
inches per equivalent, i.e., a lower number
indicates a more dense board.
Discrete components
Components with three or fewer electrical
connections (for example, resistors or
capacitors).
Electrical check
The process of checking the PCB to ensure
that the connections they are on match
those specified in the net list.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Definition
Fill zone
A zone that defines an area to be filled with
copper.
Fine pitch
A class of surface-mount components that is
characterized by pins measuring 0.025
inches or less from pad center to pad center.
Footprint
The physical description of a component. It
consists of three elements: padstacks,
representing the pads of the component;
obstacles, representing among other things,
the physical outline of the component,
silkscreens, keepouts/keepins, and assembly
drawing data; and text documenting the
footprint information (for example, the
component name). You may want each
project to have its own footprint library
containing all the footprints used in that
project.
Ground plane
A large area on the PCB, usually an entire
layer, that provides a common ground
connection for all component ground pins
and other ground connections.
Heatsink
A mechanical device made of a high thermal
conductivity material that dissipates heat
generated by a component or assembly.
Heuristics
A method of routing that consists of
repeated attempts to apply very simple
routing patterns to unrouted connections in
order to complete the routing quickly and
cleanly. Typically, heuristics are used for
memory and short point-to-point routing.
Hole
The area where board material must be
removed by drilling or milling.
Isolation
The clearance around a pad, track, zone, or
via that defines the nearest approach
allowed by conductors of another signal set.
Jumper wire
A discrete electrical component or wire used
to make electrical connections between
points that have no copper etch due to board
density or some other factor.
Keepout
An area fill within which no routing is
allowed.
359
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
360
Definition
Land
The copper pad needed for a surface mount
pin.
Layer
The copper pad needed for a surface mount
pin.
Manual routing
Individual connections, in the form of
traces, vertices, arcs, and so on, which are
entered manually into the PCB design.
Mounting hole
A hole used for the mechanical support of a
PCB or for the mechanical attachment of
components to a PCB.
Multi-layer board
A PCB that has multiple layers, separated by
dielectric material, with connectivity
between layers established by vias or
through-holes. This term usually refers to a
board with more than two layers.
Net
A logical construct (circuit) that originates
in a schematic and is transferred to a board
to describe required electrical connections.
The connections may be completed by using
vias, tracks, or zones.
Net list
List of names of symbols or parts and their
connection points which are logically
connected in each net of a circuit. A net list
can be extracted electronically on a
computer from a properly prepared
schematic.
Obstacle
An outline representing an object on the
board. It must be taken into account during
routing, placement, or copper pour.
Pad
On a PCB, a copper shape on one or more
layers (there may be a hole and an isolation
surrounding the copper) used for
connecting a component pin to the PCB.
The pad indicates where pins of a
component are placed.
Padstack
A numbered list of pad descriptions. Each
description contains a pad definition,
including layer, style, drill diameter, size,
offset, and solder mask guard width.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Definition
PCB - Printed Circuit Board
A PCB is a board made up of components
affixed to a common surface and connected
by copper tracks.
Pin
The portion of a component to which an
electrical connection can be made.
Polarity
Positive polarity refers to visible items.
Negative polarity refers to items that become
transparent to reveal underlaying layers or
background color.
Ratsnest
A number of unrouted straight-line
connections between two or more pads that
represent the electrical connections in the
netlist. The ratsnest serves as a reminder
that the pads must be connected, and that,
currently, there is no track on the board to
make that connection.
Reference designator
A character string denoting the type of
component and a number that is specific to
that component.
Routing
Placing conductive interconnects between
components on a PCB layout. The process of
turning nets into tracks.
Schematic
A graphical description of an electrical
circuit.
Segment
The partial track that exists between two
adjacent vertices or between a vertex and a
pin. Sometimes the track between two pins
is also called a segment, although
connection is usually the more appropriate
term here.
Signal
An electrical impulse of a predetermined
voltage, current, polarity, and pulse width.
Silkscreen
Text or outlines (in ink) on the solder mask,
on the top, and sometimes on the bottom of
board modules. A silkscreen is used for
component and identification placement on
a PCB and usually includes component
outlines, reference designators, polarity
indicators, pin one markings, part numbers,
the company name, and copyright info.
361
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
362
Definition
SMT - Surface Mount Technology
PCB technology whereby the leads on the
chips and components are soldered onto the
surface of the board rather than inserted
into it. The use of SMT results in smaller
and faster printed circuit boards.
Solder mask
A negative plot of pads with a guard band
around the pads. Also, a lacquer applied to
prevent solder from adhering to unwanted
areas on the PCB.
Solder paste
A pattern that serves as a template for solder
paste application when the board is
manufactured.
Solder side
The PCB surface opposite the one on which
most components are mounted (component
side). Also, the bottom layer of the board.
Test point
A special point of access to an electrical
circuit that is used for electrical testing
purposes.
Through-hole via
A via that connects the surface layers on a
PCB.
Trace (Track)
The copper trails (electrical connection
between two or more points) on the PCB
and the onscreen representation of that
copper.
Venting patterns
Patterns etched in the board that allow gases
formed during fabrication to escape.
Vertex
A logical point at which a track is ended and
restarted. A vertex is located at each change
of direction on the track.
Via (feed-through hole)
A hole connecting layers of a PCB. A
through-hole via connects the surface layers
of a board. On multilayer boards, a via not
reaching a surface layer on one side is called
a blind via, and a via not reaching a surface
layer on either side, thus being externally
invisible, is called a buried via.
Viastack
A numbered list of via descriptions. Each
description contains a via definition,
including layer, style, drill diameter, size,
offset, and solder mask guard width.
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
EDA Term
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
Definition
Via string
The copper etch that exists between a SMT
pad and a corresponding fanout via.
Zero-length connection
An unrouted connection between layers
where the end points in the connection have
the same X- and Y- coordinates.
Zone
An area on a PCB layer designated as copper
or anti-copper. Copper zones may have net
names, while anti-copper zones may not.
363
APPENDIX A: EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
364
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
14
Feedback
If you have any questions or require support for AutoVue please contact your
system administrator. Some customization and maintenance must be done on
the server and cannot be implemented on the client machine. If the administrator is unable to resolve the issue, please contact Oracle Corp.
General Inquiries
Web Site:
http://www.oracle.com/us/products/applications/autoVue/index
.html
Blog:
https://blogs.oracle.com/enterprisevisualization/
Customer Support
Web Site:
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
http://www.oracle.com/autovue/index.html
365
FEEDBACK
MY ORACLE SUPPORT AUTOVUE COMMUNITY
My Oracle Support AutoVue Community
Web Site:
https://communities.oracle.com/portal/server.pt
Sales Inquiries
E-mail:
366
[email protected]
ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
367
Index
Numerics
2D
markup entities 257
markups 246, 256
measuring 73
non-vector
angle 78
arc 80
area 76
calibrating distance 76, 129, 190,
263, 274, 282, 296
distance 74
snapping modes 73, 272
vector
angle 79
arc 80
area 77
calibrating arc 81, 134, 193, 266,
278, 286, 299
vector files
distance 75
non-vector markup measure entities 261
text search 51
vector files 56
analyzing 66
comparing 67
displaying layers 57
displaying xrefs 58
manipulate 56
overlay 64
modify 64
remove 65
selecting blocks 58
vector markup measure entities 271
viewing options 52
pan and zoom window 55
selecting views 65
specifying a view point 66
working with 2D files 51
3D
3D views 153
advanced 3D search 185
bill of material 178
Bookmarks tab 22, 88, 139
comparing files 174, 175, 176
display attributes 147
color 149
transparency 149
visibility 148
entity properties 156
entity search 180, 182
attribute-based search 183
save results 186
explode 172, 173
options 172
save 173
files 135
global axes 139
light setting 150
ambient 150
directional 151
new light source 151
properties 152
remove light source 153
manipulate mode 164
panning model 164
rotating model 165
scaling model 165
manipulating views 145
markup entities 291
markup measure entities
create 292
markups 246, 291
measuring 187
angle 192
arc 192
calibrating arc 81, 134, 193, 266, 278,
286, 299
calibrating distance 76, 129, 190, 263,
274, 282, 296
distance 189
edge length 194
face surface 195
minimum distance 191
snapping modes 187, 293
367
vertex coordinates 194
Model Tree 142, 143, 144
hiding 144
XRefs 143
Models tab 24, 137
PMI entities 160
recentering 141, 142
entity reference 141
render modes 147, 148
sectioning 170
cut options 170
options 170
section plane 171
selecting model parts 140
text markup 301
transformation 166
buttons 167
reset 168
setting values 169
Views tab 25, 138
3D dynamic rendering 208
3D Model Tree 24, 137
3D rendering 208
3D views 153
camera view 153
default view 153
native views 154
perspective 155
user-defined view 154
delete 155
view points 155
A
About dialog
version and buid information 17
archive files 30
arrow style 317
AutoVue 15
basics 17
graphical user interface 18
GUI
menu bar 19
toolbars 19
AutoVue GUI
AutoVue properties toolbar 19
AutoVue toolbar 19
368
Markup entity toolbar 20
AutoVue properties toolbar 19
AutoVue toolbar 19
B
base font 206
batch print 321
Bill of Material (BOM) 116
Bookmarks tab 22, 88, 139
build information 17
bylayer 313
C
calibrating arc 81, 134, 193, 266, 278, 286, 299
calibrating distance 76, 129, 190, 263, 274,
282, 296
change color
markup layer 242
Components tab 22, 85
configure 201
2D 206
colors 207
snap settings 207
3D 208
align with current UCS 214
background 213
background gradient 213
background images 213
color 211
dynamic load mesh resolution 210
dynamic rendering 208
frame rate 209
geometry highlight 212
initial visibility 210
loading 210
miscellaneous 214
model 209
PMI filtering 211
PMI initial visibility 211
rendering 208
section highlight 212
selection 214, 215
show global axes 214
tree level 214
base font 206
369
CAD file options 202
common 212, 218
desktop office 221
EDA 215
3D PCB view 216
3D view 219
colors 218
cross probing 217
dim unselected 215, 216
highlight entity 215
synchronize layers 217
thicken highlighted entity 216
tooltips 216
font paths 205
general options 202
graphic files 220
measurement 206
paths 204
raster files 203
rendering 203
resources 203
XRef paths 204
convert 335
file 337
options 335
PDF 336
pen settings 338
size 337
create
markup layer 241
cross probing 106, 113
net connectivity 114
two or more EDA files 112
zoom behavior 217
zooming 114
custom color 318
custom line color 315
custom line thickness 316
D
delete
markup layer 244
markups 308
design verification 118, 122
design rule checks 118
exporting results 123
Do Not Disturb 348
drawing information 69
set of entities 70
single entity 70
tag/attributes 70
dynamic load mesh resolution 210
E
EDA 83
3D views 106
ascend hierarchy 96
BOM 116
comparing PCB 115
cross probing 106
design hierarchy 95
design verification 118
entitiy properties 93
entity properties 91
entity search 124, 125, 126
filtering entity types 91
layer sets 102
layers 97
manipulating views 105
measuring 127
angle 132
arc 133
calibrating arc 81, 134, 193, 266, 278,
286, 299
calibrating distance 76, 129, 190, 263,
274, 282, 296
distance 129
minimum distance 130
snapping modes 128, 279
net connectivity 93
net instances 94
net properties 94
selecting entities 88, 89
entity seach dialog 90
terms and definitions 357
zooming to an entity 90
enable look ahead 203
entity properties 156
attributes 156, 157
extents 160
mass properites 159
mass properties 158
369
entity properties dialog box 91
entity reference 141
entity search dialog 90
export
Markup file 239
F
file
convert 337
file properties 31
open 28
print 333
file properties 31
file version information 17
files
archive 30
open from server 29, 30
open local 28
open url 29
properties 31
streaming file 30
fill color 313, 318
fill type 317
filtering entity types 91
font 313
font paths 205
frame rate 209
From 70
G
GUI 18
H
header/footer 326
I
import
Markup file 238
insert codes 326
L
layer sets 102
user-defined layers sets
create 103
delete 104
370
save with markups 105
viewing 103
layers 97, 217
changing color 101
changing order 98
logical layer visibility 100
logical layers 97
sorting 102
physical layer visibility 99
physical layers 97
leader alignment 319
line color 313, 315
line style 316
line thickness 316
M
makrups
hyperlink 290, 304
Markup Entity Properties dialog 314
Markup entity toolbar 20
Markup file 16
Markup files 235
Markup Filter 225
Markup Indicator 27, 223
markup layers 319
Markup Navigation Tree 26, 224
Markup Panel 26, 224
markups 223, 235
2D 256
markup entities 257
2D non-vector measure 261
angle 265, 297
arc 265
area 264
calibrate arc 81, 134, 193, 266, 278,
286, 299
calibrate distance 76, 129, 190, 263,
274, 282, 296
cumulative distance 263
distance 262
2D vector measure 271
angle 276
arc 277, 298
area 131, 275
calibrate arc 81, 134, 193, 266, 278,
286, 299
371
calibrate distance 76, 129, 190, 263,
274, 282, 296
cumulative distance 274, 281
3D 291
text 301
3D markup entitites 291
3D measure
angle 276
arc 277, 298
create 292
minimum distance 299
vertex coordinates 300
attachment 247, 290, 304
edit 248
open 247
change arrow style 311
change fill color 312
change fill type 311
change font 313
change line color 309
change line style 309
change line thickness 310
color 313
consolidate Markup files 245
delete 308
EDA measure
angle 284
arc 285
area 283
cumulative distance 274, 281
distance 280
EDA
markup measure entities 278
minimum distance 286
Entity Types 225
filtering 225
formatting markup properties 308
freestyle 258
contiguous 258
non-contiguous 259
go to 304
grouping 307
hiding all markups 306
hiding selected markups 307
hyperlink 248
create 249
delete 251
edit 250
open 250
intellistamp 267
add 267
layers 241
change color 242
create 241
delete 244
moving a markup entity 245
rename 243
set active 242
toggle 243
leader 260
marking up 2D files 246
marking up 3D files 246
Markup Entity Properties dialog 314
arrow style 317
custom color 318
custom line color 315
custom line thickness 316
fill color 318
fill type 317
leader alignment 319
line color 315
line style 316
line thickness 316, 317
markup layers 319
text box visibility 319
Markup file 16
create 236
export 239
import 238
open 237
save 237, 238
save view 235
set active 240
view 240
Markup files 235
Markup Filter 225
markup information 236
Markup Navigation Tree 26, 224
Markup Panel 26, 224
measurement units and symbols 314
moving markups 305
nesting entities 290, 304
371
note 289, 303
rotating selected markups 305
selecting markups 305
signoff 251
history 253
re-approve 252
rescind 252
stamp 254
stamp library 255
delete 256
text 287
text box visibility 288
transforming markups 305
ungrouping 308
working with markup entities 304
mass properties 158, 159
Measure Distance
2D non-vector 74, 75
measurement units and symbols 314
Missing Resource icon 59
missing resources 59
missing XRef notification icon 143
Model tab 24, 137
Model Tree 24, 137, 142, 143, 144
hiding 144
XRefs 143
Models tab 24, 137
N
native print settings 327
Navigation Panel 20, 83, 89
Bookmarks tab 22, 88, 139
Components tab 22, 85
customizing 84
Models tab and Model 24, 137
Models tab and Model Tree 24, 137
Nets tab 23, 86
Views tab 25, 138
net connectivity 93
Nets tab 23, 86
O
open
file 28
Markup file 237
372
Oracle AutoVue 15
P
pan and zoom window 55
partial print preview 331
pen settings 330
PMI entities 160
aligning 162
configuring 162
captures 163
reference frames 163
views 162
filtering 161
go to 162
hyperlinks 163
PMI filtering 211
PMI initial visibility 211
print 321
file 333
header/footer 326, 327
margins 324
set 325
options 321
configure 324
partial preview 324, 331
pen settings 330
create 331
delete 331
preview a file 332
watermarks 328
add 329
Q
Quick Menus 27
R
real-time collaboration 341
chat window 354
send message to selected users 355
Collaboration Session 341
Collaboration user tree 341
Controller 342
Host 342
Lock View to Presenter 342
Observer 343
373
Pointer 344
session 345
add new users 346
assign host 350
close session 351
initiate 345
invite users 349
join 348
layer color 346
leave collaboration session 353
Lock View to Presenter 353
open a markup 347, 348
pass control 350
remove users 349
request control 352
save session markup 351
session information 353
show presenter window 352
track changes 352
Unlock View to Presenter 352
Session ID 344
Session Information 344
Session Markup file 344
Session Object 344
Show Preseneter Window 344
Unlock View to Presenter 342
real-time collaboration:Open Local File 343
real-time collaboration:Open URL 343
rename
markup layer 243
render modes 147
resolve local resources 203
Resource icon 27
specifying a view point 66
streaming file 30
Substituted Resource icon 27, 59
substituted resources 59
T
text box visibility 319
toggle
between layers 243
toolbars 19
tooltips 216
V
version information 17
exporting 17
View tab 25, 138
W
walkthrough 196
watermarks 328
workspace 89
X
XRef paths 204
S
save
markups 238
selecting entities 88
selecting views 65
Session Markup file 344
Show Net Connectivity 93
snap settings 207
snapping modes
2D 73, 272
3D 187, 293
EDA 128, 279
373
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement